Professional Documents
Culture Documents
2MLK Users Guide
2MLK Users Guide
Command/Programming Instructions
Users Manual
FEB 2006
Release 1.0
Contents
Safety Instructions
Before using the product .
For your safety and effective operation, please read the safety instructions
thoroughly before using the product.
Safety Instructions should always be observed in order to prevent accident
or risk with the safe and proper use the product.
Instructions are separated into Warningand Caution, and the meaning
of the terms is as follows:
Warning
Caution
The marks displayed on the product and in the users manual have the
following meanings;
Be careful! Danger may be expected.
Be careful! Electric shock may occur.
The users manual even after read should be kept available and accessible
to any user of the product.
Safety Instructions
Safety Instructions when designing
Warning
Please, install protection circuit on the exterior of PLC to protect
the whole control system from any error in external power or PLC
module.
Any abnormal output or operation may cause serious problem in safety
of the whole system.
- Install applicable protection unit on the exterior of PLC to protect the system from
physical damage such as emergent stop switch, protection circuit, the upper/lowest
limit switch, forward/reverse operation interlock circuit, etc.
- If any system error (watch-dog timer error, module installation error, etc.) is detected
during CPU operation in PLC, the whole output is designed to be turned off and
stopped for system safety. However, in case CPU error if caused on output device
itself such as relay or TR can not be detected, the output may be kept on, which
may cause serious problems. Thus, you are recommended to install an addition
circuit to monitor the output status.
Never connect the overload than rated to the output module nor
allow the output circuit to have a short circuit, which may cause a
fire.
Never let the external power of the output circuit be designed to
be On earlier than PLC power, which may cause abnormal output or
operation.
In case of data exchange between computer or other external
equipment and PLC through communication or any operation of
PLC (e.g. operation mode change), please install interlock in the
sequence program to protect the system from any error. If not, it
may cause abnormal output or operation.
Safety Instructions
Safety Instructions when designing
Caution
I/O signal or communication line shall be wired at least 100mm
away from a high-voltage cable or power line. If not, it may cause
abnormal output or operation.
Safety Instructions
Safety Instructions when wiring
Warning
Prior to wiring, be sure that power of PLC and external power is
turned off. If not, electric shock or damage on the product may be
caused.
Before PLC system is powered on, be sure that all the covers of
the terminal are securely closed. If not, electric shock may be
caused.
Caution
Let the wiring installed correctly after checking the voltage rated
of each product and the arrangement of terminals. If not, fire,
electric shock or abnormal operation may be caused.
Secure the screws of terminals tightly with specified torque when
wiring. If the screws of terminals get loose, short circuit, fire or
abnormal operation may be caused.
Surely use the ground wire of Class 3 for FG terminals, which is
exclusively used for PLC. If the terminals not grounded correctly,
abnormal operation may be caused.
Dont let any foreign materials such as wiring waste inside the
module while wiring, which may cause fire, damage on the product
or abnormal operation.
Safety Instructions
Safety Instructions for test-operation or repair
Warning
Dont touch the terminal when powered. Electric shock or abnormal
operation may occur.
Prior to cleaning or tightening the terminal screws, let all the
external power off including PLC power. If not, electric shock or
abnormal operation may occur.
Dont let the battery recharged, disassembled, heated, short or
soldered. Heat, explosion or ignition may cause injuries or fire.
Caution
Dont remove PCB from the module case nor remodel the
module. Fire, electric shock or abnormal operation may occur.
Prior to installing or disassembling the module, let all the
external power off including PLC power. If not, electric shock or
abnormal operation may occur.
Keep any wireless installations or cell phone at least 30cm away
from PLC. If not, abnormal operation may be caused.
1.2 Characteristics
1) Easy programming device supported (SoftMaster-200)
2) Program modification available during run mode
3) Open network intended by international standard of communication protocol adopted
4) Modification available simultaneously with monitoring during run mode
5) Various special modules completely provided to enlarge the PLC application range
6) Various instructions of 785 kinds supported including floating point operation and string type operation
Notes
Precautions for compatibility of MasterLogic-200 CPU PLC programs
1) I/O area and data register (D) area are different from each other, based on CPU module.
Refer to Data types and Application Methods (2.2) to change programs
2) The existing program should be made back-up prior to change to a compatible program.
3) Parameters can not be converted.
1-1
Chapter 2 Function
Chapter 2 Function
2.1 Performance Specification
Performance specifications of standard CPU module (2MLK-CPUS) and high performance CPU module
(2MLK-CPUH) are as follows;
Operation Method
I/O Control Method
2MLK-CPUS
2MLK-CPUH
Cyclic operation, Time-driven operation
Fixed period operation
Scan synchronized batch processing method (refresh method), Direct
method by instruction
Ladder Diagram
Instructions List
Program Language
Number of
Instructions
Processing
Speed
(Basic
Instruction)
Basic
40
Application
232 types
LD
0.084 /Step
0.028 /Step
MOV
0.252 /Step
0.084 /Step
Real
operation
+,-: 1.17
x: 1.09 (S), 2.07 (D)
: 1.12 (S), 2.09 (D)
+,-: 0.196
x: 0.70 (S), 1.512 (D)
: 0.728 (S), 1.526 (D)
32 ksteps
64 ksteps
3,072
6,144
Total 758
T
Data
Area
Remarks
Specification
Item
C0000 ~ C2047
S00.00 ~ S127.99
Area changeable
according to
parameter setting
D00000 ~ D19999
D0000 ~ D32767
U0.0~U3F.31
U0.0~U7F.31
N00000 ~ N21503
R
Flash Area
1 block
2-1
Special module
data Refresh
area
Index register
2 block
2Mbyte, 32 block
S: Single Real
number
D: Double Real
number
1 block: 32 Kword
(R0 ~ R32767)
R device can be
control
Chapter 2 Function
Item
Remarks
Specification
2MLK-CPUS
2MLK-CPUH
Total programs
256
Program
Initialization task
ConfiguraTime-driven task
tion
32
32
Operation mode
Self-diagnostic function
Program port
Data retention
at power failure
940mA
Weight
0.12kg
2-2
Modbus slave
Supported by RS-232C
port
15 m in total length
Chapter 2 Function
P0000 0
Expression
of Word
Expression of Bit
(Hexadecimal)
M00000
M00000s 1 bit
Bit number
Here, Word device number is displayed in decimal and bit number in hexadecimal. For example, in
order to express D10s bit number 1, let it set D10.1. D11s b10 bit is to be specified as D11.A.
2-3
Chapter 2 Function
th
D00010s 10 bit
D00010.A
M00000
b15
D00010
b0
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Remark
1) Bit device can be also processed in word unit like word device. However, such expression as P10.1 is
unavailable differently from word device.
2-4
Chapter 2 Function
2.2.3 Nibble / Byte data (Nibble/Byte)
Nibble and byte as newly added types of data to MasterLogic-200 are used in instructions with 4 or 8
attached at the back of the name of each instruction.
Nibble and byte can be used with start bit input. And from input contact to 4/8 bits will be the data to
process.
1) Expression range
Nibble: 0~15
Byte: 0~255
(4 bits)
(8 bits)
2) How to use
(1) Bit device (P,M,K,F,L) : takes 4 or 8 bits from bit devices contact used as operand. When 4
or 8 bits is taken, the bit which exceeds the applicable bit devices area only will be processed as 0.
If the operand is the destination specified, the data of the exceeded area will be lost.
P0000
(WORD)
MOV 4
P00004
b15
P00010
b0
b4
P0001
(WORD)
b15
b0
b4
(2) Word device: takes 4 or 8 bits from word devices bit contact used as operand. When
specified bit contact is used as the source and 4 or 8 bits is taken from specified contact,
the bit which exceeds the applicable word unit will be processed as 0. As similarly as above, if
specified bit contact is used as the destination, the data exceeding the word will disappear.
D00010
(WORD)
b15
D00010.C
Byte data
MOV 8
D00010.C
D00100.4
b4
b0
D00100
(WORD)
b0
b15
b4
Remark
1) Since T and C are used as bit or word data based on the instruction applied, which may cause confusion, T
and C devices can not be used in nibble & byte instructions.
2-5
Chapter 2 Function
2.2.4 Word data (Word)
Word data is 16-bit numeric data. It can be expressed in decimal and hexadecimal. If data is to be
expressed in hexadecimal, H should be added in front of the number.
Decimal: -32768 32767 (Signed operation) or 0 65535 (Unsigned operation)
Hexadecimal: H0 HFFFF
Word data can be expressed through word device or bit device.
1) Word device
Word device is specified in 1 point (word) unit.
P00010
MOV
D10 D20
1 word such as D10, D20 is the object
2) Bit device
The bit device is expressed with its lowest digit (Digits expressed in hexadecimal position to display
bit) taken out and will be designated as word data.
P00010
MOV H1234 P0000
b15
b0
F E D C B A 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
P0000
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
1
Remark
1) MasterLogic-200 instructions are based on signed operation. U will be added to instructions based on
unsigned operation.
Example) ADD : Signed operation
ADDU: Unsigned operation
2-6
Chapter 2 Function
2.2.5 Double word data (Dword)
Double word data is 32-bit numeric data. It can be expressed in decimal and hexadecimal. If data is to
be expressed in hexadecimal, H should be added in front of the number.
Decimal
: -2,1474,83,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 (Signed operation) or
0 ~ 4,294,967,295 (Unsigned operation)
Hexadecimal : H0 ~ HFFFFFFFF
Double word data can be expressed through word device or bit device.
1) Word device
It specifies device number applicable to lower 16-bit data among 32-bit data.
Data of (Specified device number) and (Specified device number + 1) is used as double word data.
P00010
DMOV 1234 D21
2-point data (word) such as D21, D22 is the object
Double word instruction
2) Bit device
Like the expression of word data, the bit device is expressed with its lowest digit taken out, using the
data of (Specified device number) and (Specified device number + 1) as double word data.
P00010
DMOV 1234 P0001
2-point data (word) such as P0001, P0002 is the object
Double word instruction
2-7
Chapter 2 Function
2.2.6 Real data (REAL, LREAL)
Real data is 32bit/64bit floating decimal point data, where 32bit floating decimal point data is called Single
Real, and 64-bit floating decimal point data is called Double Real.
Expression is available only in decimal format (decimal point displayed). And both word device and bit
device are available.
: - 3.40282347e+38 ~ 3.40282347e+38
: - 1.7976931348623157e+308 ~ 1.7976931348623157e+308
Designation
F00571
Incorrect operation
error latch
Underflow latch
F00572
Overflow latch
F00573
F00570
F00574
F0057A
F0057B
F0057C
Overflow
F0057D
0-devision error
Invalid operation
error
Irregular value input
error
F0057E
F0057F
Remark
1) Expression of real data meets IEEE754 format. However, its direct input with the format is impossible.
2-8
Remarks
Chapter 2 Function
2.2.7 String data
Among application instructions, string related instructions use the data type of number, alphabet,
special sign, etc. to save in ASCII code. In addition, Korean and Chinese letters which need 16-bit
code also can be used.
String data up to NULL code (h00) is regarded as one string row. And the maximum length of a string
row is 32 bytes (including NULL). In other words, up to 31 letters are available in English only, and up
to 15 letters are available in Korean only. And mixing them is also available.
If directly input strings size exceeds the maximum limit, a warning message will be displayed in the
programming tool of SoftMaster-200 to keep such string from input. Data of maximum string input is
of 31 bytes + NULL (1 byte).
Example)
2-9
Chapter 2 Function
(1) Available to express the bit without a . (dot) when used in basic instructions as LOAD or OUT.
(2) P, M, K, F, T (bit contact), C (bit contact), L, S
(3) When index function used: If index function is used in bit device, it indicates the bit with the bit
position to which index registers value is added. However, if bit device is used in application
instruction and the instructions operand is of word data, its operation will be in word.
Example) LOAD P1[Z1]
If Z1=8, LOAD P(1+8) = LOAD P9
MOV P1[Z1] D10 If Z1=8, MOV P9 D10
2) Word device
2-10
Chapter 2 Function
2.3.2 Input Range per Device
Area
Size
Bit Contact
Word Data
32,768 points
P00000 ~ P2047F
P0000 ~ P2047
32,768 points
M00000 ~ M2047F
M0000 ~ M2047
32,768 points
K00000 ~ K2047F
K0000 ~ K2047
32,768 points
F00000 ~ F2047F
F0000 ~ F2047
T 1)
2,048 points
T0000 ~ T2047
T0000 ~ T2047
C 2)
2,048 points
C0000 ~ C2047
C0000 ~ C2047
3,072 words
U00.00.0 ~ U7F.31.F
U00.00 ~ U7F.31
128 words
Unavailable
Z0 ~ Z127
100 words
S00.00 ~ S127.99
Unavailable
180,224 points
L000000 ~ L11263F
L00000 ~ L11263
21K words
Unavailable
N00000 ~ N21503
32K words
D00000.0 ~ D32767.F
D00000 ~ D32767
R00000.0 ~ R32767.F
R00000 ~ R32767
(32K x n) words
Unavailable
ZR00000 ~ ZR65535
ZR *4)
Remarks
Warning
1) For N area, other than the area used for P2P in communication module is only available.
2) If P2P is used, assigning to N area is available up to 1~8 for P2P number, P2P No.1 consist of
00~63 blocks and for 1 block 41-word N area from N00000 to N00040 is automatically assigned for
P2P service.
3) This may cause operation error when programmed as duplicated with service area. So program
with other area than assigned for P2P service.
1)
The word data in timer represents the bit contacts present value.
The word data in counter represents applicable bit contacts current value.
3)
n expression is a block number, If 2MLK-CPUH n=2 and 2MLK-CPUS n=1. 32K words are 1 block size, available bit
contact to display is R00000.0 ~ R32767.F. In addition, word data can be also expressed only up to R00000 ~ R32767.
Refer to 2.3.13 for more details.
*4)
n expression is a block number, ZR expression range is different according to the size of the n. Refer to 2.3.13 for
details.
2)
2-11
Chapter 2 Function
2.3.3 I/O P
I/O P, as the area equivalent to external equipment is composed of push button used as input device,
input section to receive signals of switch or limit switch, solenoid used as output device, and output
section to deliver operation result to motor and lamp.
As for input section P, since input status is kept in PLCs internal memory, contact A and B are
available to use. And as for output section P, contact A and B are also available. Other sections than
used for I/O in P area can be used just like the auxiliary relay M. According to instructions applied, it
can be used in word unit.
2-12
Chapter 2 Function
As shown in Fig. 2.2, P area has sections correspondent 1:1 to each contact of I/O module, which
performs operation with CPUs internal memory (P area) status regardless of I/O modules contact
status while PLC is scanning (calculating), wholly outputs the content of the internal memory P area
correspondent to output contact after the operation, and then saves the input modules contact
status in the internal memory P area for the next operation.
Be careful input and outputs contact are assigned all to P area regardless of the status, which may
cause error due to confusion between input P area and output P area when programming.
2.3.4 Auxiliary relay M
As an internal relay inside PLC, direct external output is impossible, but if connected with I/O P, it will
be then possible. When power is On or RUN, other areas than specified as latch area by parameter
setting will be all eliminated to 0. A and B contacts can be used.
2.3.5 Keep relay K
Its application purpose is identical to the auxiliary relay M. However, when power is On or RUN, act
like a latch area 1 in basic parameter used as latch area to preserve the previous data.
A and B contacts are available. The data will be eliminated by the following operation. (It is identical to
the operation characteristic of latch area 1. Refer to CPU users manual 5.5.5 Data latch area
setting.)
(1) Making a Delete program and execute a Delete program.
(1) Execute a function to delete memory of the PLC delete menu in SoftMaster-200.
(2) Reset key operating of CPU module or Overall reset by SoftMaster-200.
2.3.6 Link relay L
The area is for communication module use of flag area when communication module installed. It is
provide the information of communication module (O/S information, service information, flag
information). It is preserve the data identically to the operation characteristic of latch area 1.
If communication module is not used, it can be used identically to the auxiliary relay M.
Remark
1) Refer to the content of View Flag in Variable/comment in SoftMaster-200 Software for details on P2P and
High-speed link flag used for L area, or the manual of applicable communication module.
2-13
Chapter 2 Function
2.3.7 Timer T
4 types of basic cycle available are 0.1ms, 1ms, 10ms and 100ms, whose operation method is
different respectively based on 5 kinds of instructions (TON, TOFF, TMR, TMON, TRTG).
Maximum setting value is available up to hFFFF (65535) in decimal or in hexadecimal. Timer types
and Operation methods are as shown below in (Figure2.3).
Timer Instruction
Timer Area
Input Condition
Type of Timers
Detail
Operation
Time Chart
On Delay Timer
Input
TON
On Delay
Setting Value
Addition
t = Setting Value
Output
Input
TOFF
Off Delay
Subtraction
Output
t = Setting Value
Input
TMR
Integration On
Delay
Addition
Integration Timer
t2
t1
t = Setting Value
(t1+t2)
Output
Monostable Timer
Input
TMON
Monostable
Subtraction
Output
t = Setting Value
Retriggerable
Input
t
TRTG
Retriggerable
Subtraction
Output
2-14
t = Setting Value
Chapter 2 Function
2.3.8 Counter C
The count starts at Rising Edge (Off On) of input condition and stops if reset input then to eliminate
the present value to 0 or to replace it with setting value.
Operation methods are different from each other based on 4 kinds of instructions (CTU, CTD, CTUD,
CTR), with maximum setting value available up to hFFFF. Counter types and Operation Methods are
as shown below in Fig. 2.4.
Type of
Counters
Detail
Operation
Time Chart
Reset
CTU
Up
Counter
Count
Pulse
Addition
Setting Value
Present
Value
Output
Reset
Count
Pulse
CTD
Down
Counter
Subtraction
Setting Value
Present
Value
Output
Reset
CTUD
Up/Down
Counter
Addition/
Subtraction
Addition
Pulse
Subtraction
Pulse
Setting Value
Present
Value
Output
Reset
Count
Pulse
CTR
Ring
Counter
Addition
Setting Value
Present
Value
Output
2-15
Chapter 2 Function
2.3.9 Data register D
It preserves internal data, where Read/Write is available in 16 bits, 32 bits and bit by bit in addition
with bit expression.
As for 32 bits, specified number is processed in the lower 16 bits, and specified number + 1 is
processed in the upper 16 bits.
Bit expression in data register uses the format of Specified number. Specified bit. At this moment,
specified bit is expressed in hexadecimal. (Refer to 2.2)
When power is On or RUN, other areas than specified as latch area by parameter will be all
eliminated to 0, and the latch area will be kept as before. Refer to Parameter Setting to specify the
latch area.
Example) If 32-bit instruction is used with D10 specified.
D00020
0/1
F
b0
0/1 0/1 0/1
E
0/1 0/1
0/1 0/1
9
0/1 0/1
2
0/1
0
D00020.A
MOV
h00F3
P00004
2-16
Chapter 2 Function
2.3.10 Step control relay S
As a relay used to control step, it is divided into Last-input preferred and sequence control, based on
instructions (OUT, SET) applied.
When power is On or RUN starting, other areas than specified by parameter will be all eliminated to
the first step of 0.
Refer to the section of chapter 4 OUT Sxx.xx, SET Sxx.xx for more details
2-17
Chapter 2 Function
2.3.11 Special relay F
This relay provide for information of System. It can be Read up to F0000~F1023. It is provide for overall
information of PLC current status, O/S information, RTC data and System clock etc.
Next area of F1024 word is possible limited Write use of private instruction. This area can be use
inspection of external device Warning and Error. Refer to CPU users manual Chapter 6.7.
2.3.12 Special module register U (Refresh area)
This register is used to read data from special module installed on slot.
Data of special module installed by back-plain controller will be automatically updated in refresh area.
32 words per slot are assigned to U area.
Thus, U area is made up of 4,096 words in total (8 bases * 16 slots * 32 words = 4,096 words).
U area value used per slot is fixed regardless of slot which module is installed on or which is empty.
Basic expression of U area is in Uxy.z, where x is for base number 0~ 7, y is for slot number 0 ~ F,
and z is for internal memorys word number of special module.
U area is also expressed in bit with U3A.12.x (x: Bit position, in hexadecimal).
If no special module is installed on the actually specified slot, or effective data area specified is
exceeded, the specified areas value will be 0 with no error found.
For example, if the refresh area of the special module installed on slot No.1 of base No. 1 are
effective only up to 4 words (No.0 ~ No.3), the word No.4 (U31.04) will be read as 0. Thus, h00F3 will
be saved in D00004.
P00052
ADD
h00F3
U31.04
D00004
Use PUT(P) or GET(P) instruction to read or write value in other area than refresh area of the special
module installed.
Refer to Information about area of each module with special module users manual.
If the data is written in U area of D/A conversion module installed, It is refreshed at Scan End and it is
outputted.
Data can be written in specified position only with D/A conversion module.
If an instruction is used to save data in position on which other module than D/A conversion module is
installed, it is processed by NOP instruction. In this case, no error may occur.
2-18
Chapter 2 Function
2.3.13 File register R
File register is exclusively used for internal flash memory. Flash memory can not save the data when
processing scan program, since it takes a little time to save the data. So scan program using the flash
memory data move to the file register. If need to save the data, save to the flash memory again.
1) Characteristics
(1) As an exclusively used register for internal flash memory, it is used to read or write a block of internal
flash to the file register.
*1)
(2) The size of one block is 32K word, identical to that of the block of internal flash memory.
(3) Write the data of file register in flash memory with EBWRITE instruction to keep the data permanently.
(4) File register operates same as latch area 1. Namely, Data is eliminated by Overall reset with reset
Completion state can be checked via the bit of applicable block of F160 (_RBLOCK_RD_FLAG) and
F162 (_RBLOCK_WR_FLAG).
(6) Both index function and indirect setting are available. At this time, indirect setting range for ZR is up to
ZR0~ZR32767 words, and Index function ([Z]) range available is -32768~32767 among device
number of ZR. As for R, both indirect setting and index function are all available in the specified block
range. If applicable block range is exceeded, index-exceeded error occurred.
2) Size
Classification
2MLK-CPUS
2MLK-CPUH
File register
*1)
Only one block (block 0) of the file register is provided for 2MLK-CPUS. And 2 blocks are provided for 2MLK-CPUH.
Both units of the internal flash memory have 32 blocks in total.
2-19
Chapter 2 Function
3) How to express
(1) R - File register block unit expression (32K word fixed per block)
(2) ZR Whole file register expression (range depends on unit type )
(3) Flash area has no device name, accessible by exclusive instruction.
Device
Name
Bit
expression
Word
expression
(including
DW)
Write
Read
[Z]
ZR
Exclusive
instruction
Exclusive
instruction
Permanently
Internal
Flash
Data preserved
4) Error flag
Number
Size
F158
Word
Designation
Flag of block No.
Representative flag of flash
block Read
Representative flag of flash
block Write
Representative flag of flash
block Write error
Description
Remarks
F1590
BIT
F1591
BIT
F1592
BIT
F1600
~ F161F
BIT
32
F1620
~ F163F
BIT
32
F1640
~ F165F
BIT
32
2-20
Chapter 2 Function
2.3.14 Communication register N
Communication register is exclusively used for P2P register which is available for P2P service setting when
communication module of Snet, FEnet, FDEnet and the others are installed on slot. P2P setting is available
with Network Manager (SoftMaster-PD) and private instructions. Communication register N used for P2P
setting with instructions.
Private instructions for P2P setting refer to chapter 4. Details of instructions.
It can be set 64 blocks (0~63) per P2P service (P2P 1~ P2P 8). And one block can assign 1 word station
number, 4 read areas and 4 save areas (1~4). Also, there are device name save area of 4 words and variable
number save area each read and save area.
P2P No.
P2P 1
P2P 2
P2P 3
P2P 4
P2P 5
P2P 6
P2P 7
P2P 8
Block No.
1 ~ 63
0 ~ 63
0 ~ 63
0 ~ 63
0 ~ 63
0 ~ 63
0 ~ 63
0 ~ 63
Station number
WRITE Device1 Name
WRITE Device1 Size
WRITE Device2 Name
WRITE Device2 Size
WRITE Device3 Name
WRITE Device3 Size
WRITE Device4 Name
WRITE Device4 Size
READ Device1 Name
READ Device1 Size
READ Device2 Name
READ Device2 Size
READ Device3 Name
READ Device3 Size
READ Device4 Name
READ Device4 Size
-
N device
Remark
N00000
N00001 ~ N00004
N00005
N00006 ~ N00009
N00010
N00011 ~ N00014
N00015
N00016 ~ N00019
N00020
N00021 ~ N00024
N00025
N00026 ~ N00029
N00030
N00031 ~ N00034
N00035
N00036 ~ N00039
N00040
N00041 ~ N02623
N02624 ~ N05247
N05248 ~ N07871
N07872 ~ N10495
N10496 ~ N13119
N13120 ~ N15743
N15744 ~ N18367
N18368 ~ N20991
It can remove only [Online]-[Clear PLC] menu on SoftMaster-200 since N area is always latched.
Remark
(1) N20992~N21503 area not used in P2P service can be used for Data register(D). But, it is basically
latched area different from D.
2-21
Chapter 2 Function
2) Application instructions
Application instructions are almost the others than basic instructions. According to functions of
instructions, they can be classified as described in 3.4. In this chapter, they will be classified based on
operand types so to understand MasterLogic-200 instructions without difficulty.
Operand types are bit, nibble/byte, word/double word, real, string, etc.
2-22
Chapter 2 Function
2-23
Chapter 2 Function
2.4.2 Mnemonic generation
1) Data Type
None : Word
D : Double word
R : Single Real number
L : Double Real number
$ : String
4 : Nibble
8 : Byte
B : Bit
2) Other Expressions
G : Group
P : Pulse type instruction
B : Data in BCD format
U : Unsigned data
Even if with some exceptions, the instructions derivable from one instruction will confirm to the
regulations specified below;
Only one letter can be positioned in front of the basic instruction, and 2 or more letters at the back.
Example) DADDBP
ADD
D
R
L
$
G
B
4
8
B
P
U
<Exceptions >
In Input Terminal Compare Instruction, the data type is positioned at the back of instruction.
All the instructions with prefix or suffix in front or at the back are not always derived instructions.
Example) GET, SUB, STOP
2-24
Chapter 2 Function
2.4.3 Signed operation and Unsigned operation
Basic instruction system of MasterLogic-200 is of signed operation. Both Signed / Unsigned
operations are all available for 4 basic operations, Increase/Decrease operation, and Compare
operation among operation instructions.
1) Operation instruction
Signed operation instructions: ADD, SUB, MUL, DIV, DADD, DSUB, DMUL, DDIV, INC, DEC, DINC,
DDEC.
Unsigned operation instructions: ADDU, SUBU, MULU, DIVU, DADDU, DSUBU, DMULU, DDIVU,
INCU, DECU, DINCU, DDECU.
Difference: Signed operation dose not set CY, Z flag according to operation result. Namely,
if the program is prepared to add 1 to 16#7FFF with ADD instruction, its result will be
16#8000 (-32768) with no flag set. On the other hand, unsigned operation instruction sets CY,
Z flag according to operation result.
2) Compare instructions
Signed instructions : LOAD X, AND X, OR X, LOADR X, ANDR X, ORR X, LOAD$ X, AND$ X,
OR$ X, LOAD3 X, AND3 X, OR3 X, etc.
Unsigned instructions: CMP, DCMP, CMP4, CMP8, TCMP, GCMP, etc.
Since Compare instructions have no flag (CY, Z) generated, the difference only is between
Signed and Unsigned compared.
2.4.4 Indirect setting type ( # )
Value of the number that devices data value specified in a device indicates is taken.
For example, if the value of 200 is saved in D100 with #D100 used, it means that the value of
200 in D100, namely, D areas 200th D200 is specified.
Available device: P area, M area, K area, L area, N area, D area, R area, ZR area
At this moment, each indirect setting can not exceed each devices range. In other words, #P can
not be used to indicate M area.
If any value of indirectly specified device exceeds applicable devices area, operation error flag
(F110) will be On.
Indirect setting is not available for bit, nibble and byte operand.
Example)
2-25
Chapter 2 Function
Remark
1) Each devices indirect setting range available is as follows;
P area, M area, L area, K area : respectively 0 ~ 2047
D area : 0 ~ 32767
R area : 0 ~ 32767
ZR area : 0 ~ 65535 (Limited by CPU type)
2) If the device value indirectly specified exceeds applicable device area, Operation Error Flag (F110) will be
Set. If the Error operation setting is set by Continue running when an arithmetic error occurs, Operation Error
Flag will be Set and the instruction will be skip. If it is not, Operation Error Flag becomes Set and CPU module
error is occurred and operation is stop concurrently.
2) Devices available
Bit device : P, M, L, K, F, T, C
Word device : Present value of U, D, R, N, T, present value of C
Example) MOV T1 [Z1] D10 : If Z1s value is 5, T(1+5) T6s present value is transferred to D10.
How to use index for U device : Index is unavailable for slot number like U10.3 [Z10], but only
available for channel. However, based on index value, different slots channel can be specified.
3) How to use
Attach [] at the back of the operand to use.
Example of bit device : Based on types of operands (bit/word) used for applicable instruction, its
indexing will be in bit/word unit.
Example.1) LOAD P10 [Z1]: If Z1s value is 5, LOAD P (10+5) LOAD P15 (bit).
Example.2) MOV P10 [Z1] D10: Where, since P10 means word, P10 [Z1] will be as P (10+5) =
P15word.
Example of word device: Indexing will be only in word unit. Absolute bit unit indexing is unavailable.
Example) LOAD D10[Z1].5 : If Z1s value is 5, LOAD P(10+5).5 LOAD P15.5 (bit).
Caution) Expression such as LOAD D10.5 [Z1] can not be used.
The index function can be helpfully used in variable with the meaning of arrangement, to take the
variable value designated as index or to save the value in the specified variable.
Indirectly specified index formula is also available.
Expression: #D00010 [Z010]
Description: Process #D00010 first. In other words, if D00010s value is 100, it means #D00010
D00100. Then process D00100 [Z010].
Application: It can be applied as the arrangement notion of structure as shown below. Namely, it can
be set the start position D00100, D00200, D00300 etc. use of indirect designation. Then using the
function of Index, find the specified position.
2-26
Chapter 2 Function
#D10[Z10]
D100
D200
D300
Program Example)
P0020
MOV D100[Z10] #D10[Z3]
D200[Z3]
D103
D205
Z10
D100
0x42
D103
Z3
D10
0x200
D200
0x42
D205
0x1234
0x1234
2-27
Chapter 2 Function
Data Size
BCD4(P)
BCD8(P)
BCD(P)
DBCD(P)
4 bits
8 bits
16 bits
32 bits
BCD format
0~9
0~99
0~9,999
0~99,999,999
String data is not inspected. If data value is unavailable to express when applicable device value is monitored
in SoftMaster-200, its expression may be abnormal.
And the real data if exceeding the expression range available will cause operation error (F110).
2-28
Chapter 2 Function
In case of current Scan time means execution of real program time that is not execution cycle time.
The reason is to show the spare time of Scan time when program Add/Delete, As providing real
Scan time of current program.
Maximum Scan time indicates Fixed Period time. If time exceed the Fixed Period time, Scan time
will be shown real exceeded Scan time.
2-29
Chapter 2 Function
Remark
(1) If Scan time is longer than Fixed time operation setting time, _CONSTANT_ER [F0005C] flag is
ON. And CHK LED is blinking. Also, Scan time is recorded in maximum Scan time.
Classification
64 bits are assigned to each slot of base regardless of module installation or its type.
I/O number applicable to 16 slots is assigned to one base. In other words, base No.1s start number
will be P00640.
For example, assignment of I/O number to 12-slot base will be as follows;
Assignment of I/O
number (Fixed)
Slot No.
P
W
R
C
P
U
Input
16
Input
16
Input
32
10
11
In- Out- Out- Out- Out- In- Out- Out- Output put put put put put put put put
64 16
32
32
32 16 32
32 64
P0 P40 P80 P120 P160 P200 P240 P280 P320 P360 P400 P440
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
P3F P7F P11F P15F P19F P23F P27F P31F P35F P39F P43F P47F
Assignment of I/O
number (Variable)
Based on installed module specified per slot, points will be assigned thereto;
- Specified points will be assigned if installed module specified by I/O parameter.
- To the slot not specified by I/O parameter, points will be automatically assigned according to
actually installed module.
(Caution: 16 points will be assigned to 8-point module)
- 16 points will be assigned to empty slot which is not specified by I/O parameter
Points only available to specify without module specified by I/O parameter.
16 points will be assigned to special module and slot with communication module
installed
For example, assignment of I/O number to 12-slot base will be as follows;
Slot No.
P
W
R
C
P
U
Input
16
Input
16
Input
32
10
11
In- Out- Out- Out- Out- In- Out- Out- Output put put put put put put put put
64 16
32
32 32 64 32 16 32
P00 P10 P20 P40 P80 P90 P110 P130 P170 P190 P200 P220
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
~
P0F P1F P3F P7F P8F P10F P12F P16F P18F P19F P21F P23F
2-30
Chapter 2 Function
Remark
1) Assignment type of I/O number is specified in basic parameter.
2) Base number of main base is '0' fixed, and a switch to specify base number is installed on the
expansion base.
3) If module type is specified by I/O parameter, it should be identical to the type of actually installed
module to start operation.
4) Fixed type assigns of I/O number in expansion step 1 fist slot of 10 points Output module at
P00640~P0064F, Variable type assigns P00240~P0024F. Assigning I/O number of expansion
base can be certificated on System Monitor in SoftMaster-200.
5) Function of reserving module points to draw up a program without changing I/O number when
module replace with alternative device expansion or malfunctioning.
6) Refer to 2.3 Basic System in CPU manual for details. (The setting has to set in advance.)
100ms
T0000 ~ T2044
T0000 ~ T0999
10ms
T0001 ~ T2045
T1000 ~ T1499
1ms
T0002 ~ T2046
T1500 ~ T1999
0.1ms
T0003 ~ T2047
T2000 ~ T2047
2-31
Chapter 2 Function
Classification
Stop<->Run
Reset
Overall reset
Latch area 1
Data kept
Data kept
Data cleared
Data cleared
Latch area 2
Data kept
Data kept
Data kept
Data cleared
K, L, R devices
Data kept
Data kept
Data cleared
Data cleared
N device
Data kept
Data kept
Data kept
Data kept
Operation in set
Operation error flag is changed to Set, Error Step is recorded in F0048 (DWORD) when operation error is
occurred. In the case of Error information is recorded in System Log, PLC operation status is continued Run
status. Also, CHK LED is blinking until operation error is removed.
Operation in cancellation
PLC operation status is immediately changed on error status when operation error is occurred. Operation error
flag is changed to Set, Error Step is recorded in F0048 (DWORD). In the case of should be remove operation
error and execute Run again.
2) Continue running when a floating point error occurs
It determines whether operation will continue or not by error occurred when floating point operation instruction is
executed. Set/Cancellation operation is identical with Continue running when an arithmetic error occurs.
3) Continue running when a fuse error occurs
It determines whether operation will continue or not by short of fuse built in module. After setting of Error
information is recorded in System Log and PLC operation status continue Run status. PLC operation status will
be changed error status when function setting is canceled.
4) Continue running when a I/O module error occurs
It is not possible control at CPU by malfunctioning I/O module installed, it determines whether operation will
continue or not.
5) Continue running when a special module error occurs
It is not possible control at CPU by malfunctioning special module installed, it determines whether operation will
continue or not.
6) Continue running when a special module error occurs
It is not possible control at CPU by malfunctioning special module installed, it determines whether operation will
continue or not.
7) Continue running when a communication module error occurs
It is not possible control at CPU by malfunctioning communication module installed, it determines whether
operation will continue or not.
2-32
Chapter 2 Function
Remark
1) If module need to change the reason of 3), 4), 5), 6), it can be change in running status using
[Online]-[Module Changing Wizard] at SoftMaster-200.
Remark
1) Refer to 2.8.1 Interrupt Function for more details.
2-33
Chapter 2 Function
Operation
1) Input refresh
It reads data from input module before program is executed to save wholly in specified data memorys
input (P) area.
2) Output refresh
It outputs data in data memorys output (P) area wholly to output module after End instruction is
executed.
3) In case I/O direct instruction is executed (IORF instruction)
It will perform I/O refresh while program is executed for the I/O module specified by instruction.
In case outputs OUT instruction is executed:
It will save sequence programs operation result in output area of data memory and refresh output
contact after END instruction is executed.
Remark
1) Scan: It is a series of operations to read contact status from input module to save in P area (input refresh) and
then perform instructions from 0000 step to END in cyclic sequence based on the previous process to deal
with self-diagnosis, timer and counter, and write the value changed by program executed in output module
(output refresh).
2-34
Chapter 2 Function
2.7.2 Description of operation in applicable mode
CPU modules operation status is classified into Run mode, Stop mode and Debug mode.
How to perform operation will be described below based on each operation mode.
1) Run mode
This mode is used to perform normal program operation.
First scan start in RUN mode
Change
operation mode
Change to other mode
2-35
Chapter 2 Function
2) Stop mode
It is the mode in Stop status without program operation. Program transfer is available only in remote STOP mode
via SoftMaster-200.
(1) Process after mode changed
Output image area will be eliminated, with output refresh executed.
(2) Operation process
It executes I/O refresh.
It checks installed module if abnormal or displaced.
It deals with communication service and other internal processing.
3) Debug mode
This mode is used to search for program defects and to trace operation process. Changing to this mode is only
available in STOP mode, where details of program execution status and each data can be checked to inspect
the program.
(1) Process after mode changed
Data area will be initialized in the beginning of the mode changed.
Output image area will be eliminated, with input refresh executed.
(2) Operation process
It executes I/O refresh.
It performs debug run according to setting status.
After debug run to the last of the program, it executes output refresh.
It checks installed module if abnormal or displaced.
It performs communication and other services.
(3) Conditions of debug run
4 conditions of debug run are as described below. And if ever reached, the brake pointer of different kind can
be specified.
Operation condition
Executed one by one
operation unit
(step over)
Break Point executed
as specified
Executed based on
contacts status
Executed based on
the number of scans
specified
Description of operation
After one operation unit executed by Run instruction, it will stop.
If Break Point is specified in program, it will stop at the specified point.
If contact area to detect or status to stop is specified (Read, Write, Value), it will
stop when the specified operation occurs at the specified contact.
If the number of scans to run is specified, it will stop after run as many as the
specified number of scans.
2-36
Chapter 2 Function
4) Change of operation mode
(1) How to change operation mode
Run mode can be changed as follows;
Changeable by mode key of CPU module
Changeable by connecting programming tool (SoftMaster-200) with CPUs communication port
Changeable by other CPU module connected with network via SoftMaster-200 connected to CPUs
communication port
Changeable by SoftMaster-200, HMI and computer link module connected to network
Changeable by STOP instruction while program is executed
(2) Types of Operation modes
Operation mode can be specified as below;
Operation
mode
switch
Run
Remote
allowable
switch
X
ON
Stop
OFF
Run -> Stop
SoftMaster-200
instruction
X
Run
Stop
Debug
Mode change
executed
-
Operation mode
Run
Remote Run
Remote Stop
Debug Run
Previous Operation mode
Stop
Remote mode can be changed if in status of Remote Allowable: On, Mode Switch: Stop.
To change remote RUN to STOP with the switch, let the switch positioned at
(Stop) Run Stop.
Remark
1) If Run mode is changed by using switch in remote RUN mode, PLC will keep on running
without interruption.
2) Though modification during RUN is available with switch in RUN mode, the operation of the
mode changed via SoftMaster-200 is limited. Let it specified only not to allow mode to change
in remote area.
2-37
Chapter 2 Function
Interrupt 1 found
Interrupt 1
(Program 1)
Interrupt 2 found
Interrupt 2
(Program 2)
Interrupt 3
(Program 3)
Interrupt 2 found
Interrupt 3 found
Interrupt 2
(Program 2)
Interrupt 4
(Program 4)
Interrupt 4 found
END
Remark
1) If power is On, all the interrupt will be disabled.
2-38
Chapter 2 Function
1) Interrupt programming
Create the task in the SoftMaster-200s project window as below and add the program for each task to
execute. Refer to SoftMaster-200 manual for more details.
2) Types of tasks
Types and functions of tasks are as specified below.
Types
Standard
Quantity
32
32
Operation
conditions
Cyclic cycle
(up to 4,294, 967. 295 second
available in 1ms unit)
Specified conditions of
internal device
Detection &
Execution
Detection
delayed time
Execution
priority
2 ~ 7 levels setting
(Level 2 is most prioritized)
Task
number
2-39
Chapter 2 Function
(2) Execution priority
. Task program with higher priority will be processed first if there are lots of standing-by tasks to execute.
If standing-by tasks are with the same priority, the task that appeared earlier will be processed first.
. If cyclic cycle execution task and external contact task occur at the same time, the external
contact task will be executed first.
. Priority of tasks can be assigned only in each task.
. Priority of task programs shall be specified in consideration of characteristics, importance and requested
execution-related emergency of program.
(3) Processing delayed time
Processing delay of task program is caused by the following factors, which shall be considered when
setting task or programming.
. Tasks detection delay (refer to details of each task)
. Program execution delay due to execution of precedent task program
(4) Initialization and Relation between scan program and task program
. User defined task dose not start when initialization task program is executed.
. Since scan programs priority is the lowest, task program will be preferably processed with the scan
program stopped if task occurs. Thus, if tasks occur frequently during 1 scan or are concentrated
intermittently, scan time may increases abnormally, which needs precautions against when setting
condition of task.
(5) Protection of executed program from task program
.If continuity of program execution might be lost while performed, by a task program with higher priority,
the task program can be partially prevented from execution. At this time, DI (task program operation
disallowed) or EI (task program operation allowed) application instruction can be used to protect program.
. Insert DI application instruction in the start position to protect or EI application instruction in the
position to cancel the protection. Initialization task will not be under the influence of DI or EI application
instruction.
2-40
Chapter 2 Function
. If devices conditions which will be operation condition of internal device task program are identical
according to priority after scan program is executed completely in CPU module, it will start to execute.
(3) Precautions for internal device task program used
. Internal device task program starts to execute when the moment of scan program is completed. Thus,
even if internal device task programs execution conditions are produced in the scan program or task
program, its execution will be allowed not instantly but the moment scan program is completed.
. Execution request of internal device task program inspects the execution conditions when the moment
scan of program is completed. Thus, internal device tasks execution conditions if once produced and lost
for 1 scan by scan program or task program will not execute the task because the execution can not be
detected at the time when execution conditions are inspected.
2.8.2 Clock function
Timer device (RTC) is built in CPU module. RTC keeps timer operation with battery back-up despite power
off or momentary power failure.
RTCs timer data can be used to manage system running history or error record. Present time of RTC is
renewed every scan in Flag (F0053, F0054, F0055, F0056) related with timer.
Refer to CPU users manual 6.2 more details about function of timer.
2-41
Chapter 2 Function
2.8.3 Program modification during RUN
If SoftMaster-200 program identify with PLCs program, program can be modified without change to operation
mode.
Only one Program Block (PB) can be modified when one cycle modification in Run, modification has no limitation
in the one Program Block (PB). (There are 2 Program Block in the PLC)
There is a difference of modification time during Run by media type (RS-232C/USB) which is connected with
PLC and Read/Write data size during Run mode. Also, The shorter modification time during Run, The larger Scan
change quantity. At this moment, Battery Error Flag F00045 becomes On.
If error occurs in modification during Run, PLC executes previous program modification during Run.
WDT
0 1 2 3 ..
Count (ms)
WDT Reset
8 9 0 1 2
SCAN END
0 1 2
6 7 0 1 2
Remark
1) Setting range of watch-dog timer is 10 ~ 1000ms (1ms unit).
Refer to 6.1 Self-diagnosis in CPU manual for more details.
2-42
Chapter 2 Function
2) I/O module check function
This function is used to check I/O module for error at start and during run.
(1) In case a module is installed different from specified in parameter or in error at start, or
(2) In case I/O module is displaced or in error during run,
Applicable error will be detected with warning lamp (ERR) on in front of CPU module and CPU will stop
running.
If module installation error is detected, applicable bit in F area will be respectively ON as described below;
F area
F104[0~B]
F105[0~B]
F106[0~B]
F107[0~B]
F108[0~B]
F109[0~B]
F110[0~B]
F111[0~B]
Description
Applicable slot bit will be On if module installed on main base is in installation error.
Applicable slot bit will be On if module installed on expansion base step 1 is in
installation error.
Applicable slot bit will be On if module installed on expansion base step 2 is in
installation error.
Applicable slot bit will be On if module installed on expansion base step 3 is in
installation error.
Applicable slot bit will be On if module installed on expansion base step 4 is in
installation error.
Applicable slot bit will be On if module installed on expansion base step 5 is in
installation error.
Applicable slot bit will be On if module installed on expansion base step 6 is in
installation error.
Applicable slot bit will be On if module installed on expansion base step 7 is in
installation error.
2-43
Chapter 2 Function
(2) JMP instruction without label can not be downloaded as checked when downloading program. In addition,
in case there is label inside SBRT RET block, which is regarded error too, no program will be
downloaded.
M00020
JMP XXX_SKIP
END
SBRT function 1
XXX_SKIP
(3) Refer to Chapter 4.30.1 JMP, LABEL about the JMP-LABEL for more details.
2-44
Chapter 2 Function
2.9.2 CALL-SBRT/RET
(1) The number of CALLs is 512 available in the whole program. CALL instruction can be used as
duplicated, but SBRT/RET can not be duplicated. If CALL instruction used, SBRT/RET instruction
should be surely used.
M00020
CALL function 1
END
Application Error : Function 1" no
subroutine
(2) The subroutine should be used at the back of END.
(3) In addition, the subroutine should be finished by RET instruction. If SBRT and RET are used only
(4) Refer to Chapter 4.30.2 CALL, CALLP, SBRT, RET instruction about the CALL-SBRT/RET for more
details.
2-45
Chapter 2 Function
2.9.3 MCS-MCSCLR
(1) Interlock with higher priority will be first performed, and its cancellation in reverse order.
MCS
0 : High
MCS
7 : LOW
(2) If an interlock with higher priority is cancelled, interlocks with lower priority will be cancelled too.
MCS
MCS
0
1
MCSCLR
MCSCLR
(3) Stand Alone or END, RET instruction included block will be processed as error.
MCS
END
MCSCLR
0 : Error
2-46
Chapter 2 Function
2.9.4 FOR-NEXT / BREAK
(1) Number of application times of FOR and NEXT instruction should be identical. FOR-NEXT Block
Nesting is available up to 16 steps.
(2) Stand Alone or END, RET instruction included block will be processed as error.
(3) BREAK instruction should be positioned between FOR-NEXT.
LOAD
FOR
FOR
FOR
P0000
1
: Normal
2
3
NEXT
NEXT
NEXT
END
LOAD
P0001
FOR
20
NEXT
NEXT
: Error
END
LOAD
FOR
P0002
20
: Error (Stand Alone)
END
NEXT
END
: Error
(4) Refer to Chapter 4.31 Loop Instruction about the FOR-NEXT/BREAK for more details.
2-47
Chapter 2 Function
2.9.5 END/RET
In case there is no END instruction to complete 1 scan or no RET instruction to finish subroutine in
the program, it will be regarded as error.
LOAD
P0012
JMP
10
JMP
10
: Missing END
END
SBRT
LOAD
P0000
OUT
P0010
: Missing RET
P0000
M0000
OUT
OUT
Remark
1) Item available for setting warning or error in SoftMaster-200
- Solely used label (without JMP)
- Solely used subroutine ( without CALL)
- Duplicated coil processed
The item above can be processed with warning or error selected in Check Program menu of basic parameters
in SoftMaster-200.
2-48
Chapter 2 Function
Result
F110
F115
Normal
Off
Off
error
On
On
LOAD P0000
On
On
INC D0000
Off
On
LOAD P0001
WAND P001 M010 #D0400
error
Off
On
On
On
LOAD P0002
On
On
Off
On
CLE
WAND P001 M010 D0500
error
LOAD P0003
Off
Off
On
On
On
On
Status
Warning or error displayed during Run
RUN/STOP
LED displayed
Green LED Blinking
Red LED Blinking
ERR
On
BAT
On
CHK
On
Remark
In case of CPU module error, refer to 4.2 Part Names and Functions in CPU manual for details on LED display.
2-49
Chapter 2 Function
2.10.4 Error codes during Run
Code
Cause
Program memory
abnormal
10
USB IC error
11
12
13
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
33
Operation
status
2-50
LED status
Diagnosis Stage
Error
Whole
LEDs blink
in regular
order
Power ON
Error
ERR : ON
Power ON
Error
ERR : ON
Power ON
Error
ERR : ON
Power ON
Error
ERR : ON
Power ON
Error
ERR : ON
Power ON
STOP
ERR : ON
Power ON
Convert to Run mode
Error
ERR : ON
Reset
Convert to RUN mode
STOP
ERR : ON
Reset
Convert to RUN mode
STOP
ERR : ON
Reset
Convert to RUN mode
STOP
ERR : ON
Reset
Convert to RUN mode
STOP
ERR : ON
Reset
Convert to RUN mode
STOP
ERR : ON
Reset
Convert to RUN mode
STOP
(RUN)
ERR : ON
(P.S. : ON)
STOP
(RUN)
ERR : ON
(P.S. : ON)
Scan Ended
STOP
(RUN)
ERR : ON
(P.S. : ON)
Scan Ended
STOP
(RUN)
ERR : ON
(P.S. : ON)
Scan Ended
Power ON
Chapter 2 Function
Code
Cause
34
Normal access
unavailable to
special/link modules
data during run
39
40
41
42
43
Base duplicated
44
50
Error detected in
external equipment due
to user program during
run
55
60
E_STOP function
executed
61
Operation error
500
501
502
Operation
status
LED status
Diagnosis Stage
STOP
(RUN)
ERR : ON
(P.S. : ON)
Scan Ended
STOP
RUN: ON
ERR : ON
At ordinary times
STOP
RUN: ON
ERR : ON
While program
executed
STOP
RUN: ON
ERR : ON
While program
executed
Rerun
STOP
RUN: ON
ERR : ON
While program
executed
STOP
ERR : ON
Reset
Convert to RUN mode
STOP
(RUN)
RUN: ON
ERR : ON
Scan Ended
STOP
(RUN)
ERR : ON
(P.S. : ON)
Scan Ended
STOP
(RUN)
ERR : ON
(P.S. : ON)
While program
executed
STOP
RUN: ON
ERR : ON
While program
executed
STOP
(RUN)
ERR : ON
(P.S. : ON)
While program
executed
STOP
ERR : ON
reset
CHK: ON
At ordinary times
BAT: ON
At ordinary times
2-51
Chapter 2 Function
2.10.5 Operation error code
Code
16
17
Error
CPU status
Indirect setting
index error
Group
instruction
range check
error
Run/Stop based on
parameter setting
Run/Stop based on
parameter setting
18
0-division error
19
BCD convert
error
20
File bank
setting error
21
FPU operation
related error
22
Data format
convert error
23
BMOV error
24
DECO/ENCO
error
25
DIS/UNI error
26
27
Data control
related error
Time
data error
28
MUX error
29
Data table
instruction
error
30
SEG error
31
32
33
ASCII value
error
Position
module
Setting axis
error
String
processing
error
Cause
Action
Run/Stop based on
parameter setting
34
SORT error
Run/Stop based on
parameter setting
35
FOR nesting
error
Run/Stop based on
parameter setting
Task
number error
Device range
check error
Data related
P2P setting
error
Run/Stop based on
parameter setting
Run/Stop based on
parameter setting
36
37
38
Run/Stop based on
parameter setting
2-52
Instructions
Contact Point Instruction
Unite Instruction
Reverse Instruction
Master Control Instruction
Basic
Instructions
Output Instruction
Sequence/Last-input
Preferred Instruction
End Instruction
Non-Process Instruction
Timer Instruction
Counter Instruction
Data Transfer Instruction
Convert Instruction
Data Type Convert
Instruction
Output Terminal Compare
Instruction
Input Terminal Compare
Instruction
Increase/Decrease
Instruction
Rotate Instruction
Move Instruction
Exchange Instruction
BIN Operation Instruction
Practical
Instructions
Details
AND LOAD, OR LOAD, MPUSH, MLOAD, MPOP
NOT
MCS, MCSCLR
OUT, SET, RST, 1 Scan Output Instruction, Output
Reverse Instruction (FF)
Step Control Instruction ( SET Sxx.xx, OUT Sxx.xx )
END
NOP
TON, TOFF, TMR, TMON, TRTG
CTD, CTU, CTUD, CTR
Transfers specified Data, Group, String
Converts BIN/BCD of specified Data & Group
Special Function
Instruction
Data Control Instruction
Time related Instruction
Diverge Instruction
Loop Instruction
Flag related Instruction
Special/Communication
related Instruction
Interrupt related
Instruction
Sign Reverse Instruction
4/8/64 Bits
available
4/8 Bits
available
String
related Convert, Comment Read, String
Extract, ASCII Convert, HEX Convert, String Search,
etc.
Trigonometric Function, Exponential/Log Function, Angle/
Radian Convert, etc.
Max/Min Limit Control, Dead-zone Control, Zone Control
Remarks
JMP, CALL
FOR/NEXT/BREAK
Carry Flag Set/Reset, Error Flag Clear
Data Read/Write by BUSCON Direct Access
Interrupt Enable/Disable
Reverse Integer/Real Signs, Absolute Value Operation
3-1
Compare to
Unsigned
Compare to
Signed
4/8 Bits
available
4/8 Bits
available
4/8 Bits
available
Designations
MOV
Symbol
MOV
Description
S
(S)
MOVP
DMOV
DMOV
DMOVP
DMOVP
RM O V
Page
MOVP
32 Bits
transfer
Basic
Steps
3-13
(D)
(S+1,S)
3
2
(D+1,D )
3-19
3
2
(S+3,S+2,S+1,S)
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
3-2
Contact
Point
Designations
Symbol
Description
Basic
Steps
Page
LOAD
4-1
LOAD NOT
4-1
AND
4-3
AND NOT
4-3
OR
4-4
OR NOT
4-4
4-1
4-1
4-3
4-3
4-4
4-4
Basic
Steps
Page
4-7
4-9
4-11
LOADP
LOADN
ANDP
ANDN
ORP
ORN
Designations
Symbol
AND LOAD
Description
OR LOAD
Unite
MPUSH
MPUSH
MLOAD
MLOAD
4-11
MPOP
MPOP
4-11
Remark
1) The number of Basic Steps means the case that indirect specification, index formula and direct
variable input were not used. In other words, it represents the minimum number of the steps of the
applicable instruction.
2) The number of steps depends on indirect specification, index formula and pulse application used.
3-3
Designations
Symbol
Description
Previous Operation results Reverse
NOT
Basic
Steps
Page
4-13
Basic
Steps
Page
Designations
Symbol
Description
MCS
MCS
4-14
MCSCLR
MCS
4-14
Basic
Steps
Page
Output
Designations
Symbol
Description
OUT
4-16
OUT NOT
4-16
OUTP
4-16
OUTN
4-16
SET
4-19
RST
4-20
4-23
Basic
Steps
Page
Sequence Control
4-24
Last-input Preferred
4-26
Basic
Steps
Page
4-27
Description
Basic
Steps
Page
4-28
FF
FF
Designations
Symbol
Description
Sxx.xx
SET S
Step
Control
Sxx.xx
OUT S
Designations
Symbol
END
Description
Program End
END
Designations
Non-Process
NOP
Symbol
Ladder not displayed
3-4
Designations
Symbol
TON
TON
Description
Basic
Steps
Page
4-31
4-33
4-35
4-37
4-39
Basic
Steps
Page
Input
T
Input
TOFF
TOFF
T
t1+t2 = t
Input
Timer
TMR
TM R
t1
t2
Input
TMON
TMON
Input
TRTG
TRTG
t
T
Symbol
Description
Reset
CTD
C TD
Count
Pulse
Setting
4-43
4-44
4-47
4-48
Present
Output
Reset
Count
Pulse
CTU
C TU
Setting
Present
Output
Reset
Counter
Increased
Pulse
Decreased
Pulse
CTUD
C TU D
Setting
Present
Output
Reset
CTR
C TR
Count
Pulse
Present
Output
3-5
Setting
Designations
Symbol
Basic
Steps
Description
MOV
MOV
MOVP
MOVP
DMOV
DMOV
DMOVP
DMOVP
RMOV
RM O V
Page
2
(S)
(D)
4-49
32 bits
Transfer
Short
Real Number
Transfer
(S+1,S)
(D+1,D )
3
2
(S+1,S)
(D+1,D )
RMOVP
R M O VP
LMOV
LMOV
LMOVP
LMOVP
MOV4
MOV4
Sb Db
4-57
Long
Real Number
Transfer
(S+3,S+2,S+1,S)
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
b0
4 bits
Transfer
4bit trans
MOV4P
MOV4P
Sb Db
4
4-50
MOV8
MOV8
Sb Db
MOV8P
MOV8P
Sb Db
CMOV
CMOV
1s complement
Transfer
8bit trans
Multiple
Transfer
CMOVP
CMOVP
DCMOV
DCMOV
1s complement
(S)
(D)
3
4-52
DCMOVP
DCMOVP
16 bits
Group Transfer
b0
8 bits
Transfer
GMOV
GMOV
GMOVP
GMOVP
FMOV
FMOV
FMOVP
FMOVP
BMOV
BMOV
1s complement
(S+1,S)
(D+1,D )
(S)
(D)
(S)
(D)
BMOVP
GBMOV
BMOVP
GBMOV
Specified Bits
Group Transfer
GBMOVP
GBMOVP
3-6
4-53
4-54
4-55
(D)
(S)
b0
b15
Specified Bits
Transfer
* Z: Control Word
(S) b15
:
(S+N)
(D)
:
(D+N)
b0
N
4-56
5
* Z: Control Word
Symbol
Basic
Steps
Description
$MOV
$MOV
$MOVP
$MOVP
Page
4-58
3
BCD
Conversion
Symbol
Basic
Steps
Description
BCD
BCD
BCDP
BCDP
To BCD
(D)
BIN( 0~9999 )
To BCD
(S)
Page
4-59
DBCD
DBCD
DBCDP
DBCDP
BCD4
BCD4
Sb Db
BCD4P
BCD4P
Sb Db
(S+1,S)
(D+1,D )
BIN( 0~99999999 )
(Sb):Bit, BIN(0~9)
b15
b0
To 4bit BCD
4/8 Bits
BCD
Conversion
(Db): Bit
BCD8
BCD8
Sb Db
BCD8P
BCD8P
Sb Db
(Sb):Bit, BIN(0~99)
b15
b0
4
4-62
3
To 8bit BCD
4
(Db):Bit
BIN
Conversion
To BIN
BIN
BIN
BINP
BINP
BCD( 0~9999 )
DBIN
DBIN
To BIN
DBINP
DBINP
BIN4
BIN4
Sb Db
BIN4P
BIN4P
Sb Db
(S)
(S+1,S)
(D)
4-63
(D+1,D )
BCD( 0~99999999 )
(Sb):Bit, BCD(0~9)
b15
b0
3
3
To 4bit BIN
4/8 Bits
BIN
Conversion
4
(Db):Bit
BIN8
B IN 8
Sb D b
BIN8P
B IN 8P
Sb D b
(Sb):Bit, BCD(0~99)
b15
b0
4-65
3
To bit BIN
4
(Db):Bit
Group
BCD,BIN
Conversion
GBCD
GBCD
GBCDP
GBCDP
GBIN
GBIN
GBINP
GBINP
3-7
4-66
4-67
Symbol
I2R
(S)
I2RP
16 Bits
Integer/Real
Conversion I2L
Basic
Steps
Description
I2R P
I2L
To Real
(D+1,D)
Int( -32768~32767 )
(S)
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
Int( -32768~32767 )
I2LP
I2LP
D2R
D2R
32 Bits
D2RP
Integer/Real
Conversion D2L
D2RP
Dint(-2147483648~2147483647)
D2L
To Long
D2LP
D2LP
R2I
R2I
R2IP
Short
Real/Integer
Conversion R2D
3
4-68
To Long
(S+1,S)
To Real
2
3
2
(D+1,D)
3
4-69
(S+1,S)
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
Dint(-2147483648~2147483647)
(S+1,S)
To INT
2
3
2
(D)
R2IP
R2D
To DINT
R2DP
R2DP
L2I
L2I
L2IP
L2D
L2IP
Long
Real/Integer
Conversion L2D
L2DP
Page
4-70
(S+1,S)
L2DP
(D+1,D)
To INT
(D)
(S+3,S+2,S+1,S)
To DINT
3
2
3
4-72
(D+1,D)
2
3
Remark
1) In case of MasterLogic-200, Integer value and Real value will be saved respectively in quite different format.
For such reason, Real Number Data should be converted as applicable before used for Integer Operation.
3-8
Symbol
CMP
S1 S2
CMPP
S1 S2
DCMP
S1 S2
DCMPP
S1 S2
CMP4
C M P4
S1 S2
CMP4P
C M P 4P
S1 S2
CMP8
CMP8
S1 S2
CMP8P
CMP8P
S1 S2
CMP
Unsigned
Compare
CMPP
with Special
Relay
DCMP
used
DCMPP
4/8 Bits
Compare
Table
Compare
Description
Basic
Steps
Page
3
4-74
3
4
4-75
TCMP
TCMP
S1 S2 D
CMP(S1,S2))
:
CMP(S1+15,S2+15)
TCMPP
TCMPP
S1 S2 D
DTCMP
DTCMP
S1 S2 D
CMP((S1+1,S1),(S2+1,S2))
:
CMP((S1+31,S1+30),(S2+31,S2+30))
DTCMPP
DTCMPP
S1 S2 D
4
4-76
GEQ
GEQ
S1 S2 D
GEQP
GEQP
S1 S2 D
GGT
GGT
S1 S2 D
GGTP
GGTP
S1 S2 D
GLT
GLT
S1 S2 D
GLTP
GLTP
S1 S2 D
GGE
GGE
S1 S2 D
GGEP
GGEP
S1 S2 D
GLE
GLE
S1 S2 D
GLEP
GLEP
S1 S2 D
GNE
GNE
S1 S2 D
GNEP
GNEP
S1 S2 D
Result:(D) ~ (D+15)
Group
Compare
(16 Bits)
4
4-77
4
Remark
1) CMP(P), DCMP(P), CMP4(P), CMP8(P), TCMP(P) & DTCMP(P) Instructions all process the results of
Unsigned Compare. All the other Compare Instructions will perform Signed Compare.
3-9
Symbol
Description
GDEQ
G D EQ
S1 S2 D
GDEQP
G D EQ P
S1 S2 D
GDGT
GDGT
S1 S2 D
GDGTP
G D G TP
S1 S2 D
GDLT
G D LT
S1 S2 D
GDLTP
G D LT P
S1 S2 D
GDGE
GDGE
S1 S2 D
GDGEP
G D G EP
S1 S2 D
GDLE
G D LE
S1 S2 D
GDLEP
G D LE P
S1 S2 D
GDNE
G DNE
S1 S2 D
GDNEP
G D N EP
S1 S2 D
Basic
Steps
Page
Group
Compare
(32 Bits)
4
4-77
4
3-10
16 Bits
Data
Compare
(LOAD)
16 Bits
Data
Compare
(AND)
16 Bits
Data
Compare
(OR)
32 Bits
Data
Compare
(LOAD)
Symbol
LOAD=
S1 S2
LOAD>
>
S1 S2
LOAD<
<
S1 S2
LOAD>=
>=
S1 S2
LOAD<=
<=
S1 S2
LOAD<>
<>
S1 S2
AND=
S1 S2
AND>
>
S1 S2
AND<
<
S1 S2
AND>=
>=
S1 S2
AND<=
<=
S1 S2
AND<>
<>
S1 S2
OR=
S1 S2
OR>
>
S1 S2
OR<
<
S1 S2
OR>=
>=
S1 S2
OR<=
<=
S1 S2
OR<>
<>
S1 S2
LOADD=
D=
S1 S2
LOADD>
D>
S1 S2
LOADD<
D<
S1 S2
LOADD>=
D >=
S1 S2
LOADD<=
D <=
S1 S2
LOADD<>
D <>
S1 S2
Description
3-11
Basic
Steps
Page
4-78
4-79
4-80
4-78
32 Bits
Data
Compare
(AND)
32bt
Data
Compare
(OR)
Short
Real Number
Compare
(LOAD)
Short
Real Number
Compare
(AND)
Designations
Symbol
ANDD=
D=
S1 S2
ANDD>
D>
S1 S2
ANDD<
D<
S1 S2
ANDD>=
D >=
S1 S2
ANDD<=
D <=
S1 S2
ANDD<>
D <>
S1 S2
ORD=
D=
S1 S2
ORD>
D>
S1 S2
ORD<
D<
S1 S2
ORD>=
D >=
S1 S2
ORD<=
D <=
S1 S2
ORD<>
D <>
S1 S2
LOADR=
R=
S1 S2
LOADR>
R>
S1 S2
LOADR<
R<
S1 S2
LOADR>=
R>=
S1 S2
LOADR<=
R<=
S1 S2
LOADR<>
R<>
S1 S2
ANDR=
R=
S1 S2
ANDR>
R>
S1 S2
ANDR<
R<
S1 S2
ANDR>=
R>=
S1 S2
ANDR<=
R<=
S1 S2
ANDR<>
R<>
S1 S2
Description
3-12
Basic
Steps
Page
4-79
4-80
4-81
4-82
Symbol
ORR=
R=
S1 S2
ORR>
R>
S1 S2
R<
S1 S2
Short
ORR<
Real Number
Compare
(OR)
ORR>=
R>=
S1 S2
ORR<=
R<=
S1 S2
ORR<>
R<>
S1 S2
LOADL=
L=
S1 S2
LOADL>
L>
S1 S2
L<
S1 S2
L> =
S1 S2
LOADL<=
L< =
S1 S2
LOADL<>
L< >
S1 S2
ANDL=
L=
S1 S2
ANDL>
L>
S1 S2
L<
S1 S2
L>=
S1 S2
ANDL<=
L<=
S1 S2
ANDL<>
L<>
S1 S2
Long
Real Number LOADL<
Compare
(LOAD)
LOADL>=
Long
ANDL<
Real Number
Compare
ANDL>=
(AND)
Description
Compares (S1+3,S1+2,S1+1,S) to
(S2+3,S2+2, S2+1,S2) and saves
its result in Bit Result(BR) (Signed
Operation)
3-13
Basic
Steps
Page
4-83
4-81
4-82
Double Real
Number
Compare
(OR)
String
Compare
(LOAD)
String
Compare
(AND)
Designations
Symbol
ORL=
L=
S1 S2
ORL>
L>
S1 S2
ORL<
L<
L> =
S1 S2
ORL<=
L< =
S1 S2
ORL<>
L< >
S1 S2
LOAD$=
$=
S1 S2
LOAD$>
$>
S1 S2
LOAD$<
$<
S1 S2
LOAD$>=
$>=
S1 S2
LOAD$<=
$<=
S1 S2
LOAD$<>
$<>
S1 S2
AND$=
$=
S1 S2
AND$>
$>
S1 S2
AND$<
$<
S1 S2
AND$>=
$>=
S1 S2
AND$<=
$<=
S1 S2
AND$<>
$<>
S1 S2
Page
4-83
4-84
4-85
S1 S2
ORL>=
Basic
Steps
Description
3-14
String
Compare
(OR)
16 Bits
Data
Group Compare
(LOAD)
16 Bits
Data
Group Compare
(AND)
16 Bits
Data
Group Compare
(OR)
Designations
Symbol
OR$=
$=
S1 S2
OR$>
$>
S1 S2
OR$<
$<
S1 S2
Basic
Steps
Page
4-86
4-87
4-89
4-90
Description
OR$>=
$>=
S1 S2
OR$<=
$<=
S1 S2
OR$<>
$<>
S1 S2
LOADG=
G=
S1 S2 N
LOADG>
G>
S1 S2 N
LOADG<
G<
S1 S2 N
LOADG>=
G>=
S1 S2 N
LOADG<=
G<=
S1 S2 N
LOADG<>
G<>
S1 S2 N
ANDG=
G=
S1 S1 N
ANDG>
G>
S1 S1 N
ANDG<
G<
S1 S1 N
ANDG>=
G>=
S1 S1 N
ANDG<=
G<=
S1 S1 N
ANDG<>
G<>
S1 S1 N
ORG=
G=
S1 S2 N
ORG>
G>
S1 S2 N
ORG<
G<
S1 S2 N
ORG>=
G>=
S1 S2 N
ORG<=
G<=
S1 S2 N
ORG<>
G<>
S1 S2 N
3-15
32 Bits
Data
Group
Compare
(LOAD)
32 Bits
Data
Group
Compare
(AND)
32 Bits
Data
Group
Compare
(OR)
Designations
Symbol
LOADDG=
DG=
S1 S2 N
LOADDG>
DG>
S1 S2 N
LOADDG<
DG<
S1 S2 N
LOADDG>=
D G >=
S1 S2 N
LOADDG<=
D G <=
S1 S2 N
LOADDG<>
D G <>
S1 S2 N
ANDDG=
DG=
S1 S1 N
ANDDG>
DG>
S1 S1 N
ANDDG<
DG<
S1 S1 N
ANDDG>=
D G >=
S1 S1 N
ANDDG<=
D G <=
S1 S1 N
ANDDG<>
D G <>
S1 S1 N
ORDG=
DG=
S1 S2 N
ORDG>
DG>
S1 S2 N
ORDG<
DG<
S1 S2 N
ORDG>=
D G >=
S1 S2 N
ORDG<=
D G <=
S1 S2 N
ORDG<>
D G <>
S1 S2 N
3-16
Description
Basic
Steps
Page
4-87
4-89
Performs OR operation of
(S1), (S1+1), , (S1+N) &
(S2), (S2+1), , (S2+N) 1 to
1 Compare Result and Bit
Result(BR), and then saves its
result in BR
4-90
Designations
Symbol
LOAD3=
3=
S1 S2 S3
LOAD3>
3>
S1 S2 S3
3<
S1 S2 S3
3> =
S1 S2 S3
LOAD3<=
3< =
S1 S2 S3
LOAD3<>
3< >
S1 S2 S3
AND3=
3=
S1 S2 S3
AND3>
3>
S1 S2 S3
3<
S1 S2 S3
3> =
S1 S2 S3
AND3<=
3< =
S1 S2 S3
AND3<>
3< >
S1 S2 S3
OR3=
3=
S1 S2 S3
OR3>
3>
S1 S2 S3
<3
S1 S2 S3
>=3
S1 S2 S3
OR3<=
3< =
S1 S2 S3
OR3<>
3< >
S1 S2 S3
LOADD3=
D 3=
S1 S2 S3
LOADD3>
D 3>
S1 S2 S3
D 3<
S1 S2 S3
D 3> =
S1 S2 S3
LOADD3<=
D 3< =
S1 S2 S3
LOADD3<>
D 3< >
S1 S2 S3
3-17
Description
Basic
Steps
Page
4-91
4-92
4-93
4-91
Designations
ANDD3=
D 3=
S1 S2 S3
ANDD3>
D 3>
S1 S2 S3
D 3<
S1 S2 S3
D 3> =
S1 S2 S3
ANDD3<=
D 3< =
S1 S2 S3
ANDD<>
D 3< >
S1 S2 S3
ORD3=
D 3=
S1 S2 S3
ORD3>
D 3>
S1 S2 S3
ORD3<
D 3<
S1 S2 S3
Three 32-Bit
Data Compare
(OR)
Symbol
ORD3>=
D 3> =
S1 S2 S3
ORD3<=
D 3< =
S1 S2 S3
ORD3<>
D 3< >
S1 S2 S3
3-18
Description
Basic
Steps
Page
4-92
4-93
Designations
Symbol
Basic
Steps
Description
INC
INC
INCP
INCP
DINC
DINC
DINCP
DINCP
DEC
DEC
DECP
DECP
DDEC
DDEC
DDECP
DDECP
INC4
INC4
Db
INC4P
INC4P
Db
INC8
INC8
Db
INC8P
INC8P
Db
DEC4
DEC4
Db
DEC4P
DEC4P
Db
DEC8
DEC8
Db
DEC8P
DEC8P
Db
INCU
IN C U
INCUP
IN C U P
DINCU
D IN C U
DINCUP
D IN C U P
DECU
D EC U
DECUP
D EC U P
DDECU
D D EC U
DDECUP
D D EC U P
(D)+1
(D)
Page
2
4-94
BIN Data
Increase
/
Decrease
(Signed)
(D+1,D)
(D+1,D)+1
(D)-1
(D)
2
4-96
(D+1,D)-1
(D+1,D)
2
3
4-95
2
3
2
3
4-97
(D)+1
(D)
2
3
2
4-98
BIN Data
Increase
/
Decrease
(Unsigned)
(D+1,D)+1
(D)-1
(D+1,D)
(D)
2
4-99
3-19
(D+1,D)-1
(D+1,D)
Designations
ROL
Symbol
ROL
Basic
Steps
Description
D
b15
ROLP
ROLP
DROL
DROL
DROLP
DROLP
ROL4
ROL4
Db n
b0
CY
Rotate to Left
4-100
b31
b15
ROL4P
Db n
ROL8
ROL8
Db n
ROL8P
ROL8P
Db n
ROR
ROR
b+3
4
4-101
b+7
CY
b0
b15
CY
Rotate to Right
RORP
RORP
DROR
DROR
DRORP
DRORP
3
b15
b31
ROR4
Db n
ROR4P
ROR4P
Db n
ROR8
Db n
ROR8P
ROR8P
Db n
RCL
RCL
4
D
RCLP
DRCL
DRCL
DRCLP
DRCLP
b15
3
4-104
b31
b15
RCL4
RCL4
Db n
RCL4P
RCL4P
Db n
RCL8
Db n
RCL8P
RCL8P
Db n
RCR
RCR
3
3
CY
RCRP
DRCR
DRCR
DRCRP
DRCRP
4-105
CY
RCRP
b+7
RCL8
b0
D+1
b+3
Rotate
to Right
(including
Carry)
b0
CY
4/8 Bits
Rotate to Left
(including
Carry)
CY
RCLP
4-103
CY
Rotate to Left
(including
Carry)
CY
b+7
ROR8
CY
3
b+3
ROR4
4-102
b0
D+1
4/8 Bits
Rotate to Right
2
3
CY
ROL4P
b0
D+1
CY
4/8 Bits
Rotate to Left
Page
b0
b15
CY
3
4-106
b15
b31
3
b+3
4/8 Bits
RCR4P
Rotate to Right
(including
RCR8
Carry)
RCR8P
RCR4
Db n
RCR4P
Db n
Db n
RCR8P
Db n
CY
4
b+7
RCR8
CY
D+1
RCR4
b0
4-107
CY
3
4
3-20
Designations
Symbol
BSFT
BSFT
St Ed
BSFTP
BSFTP
St Ed
Basic
Steps
Description
St
b15
Ed
b0
4-108
Bits Move
BSFL
BSFL
BSFLP
BSFLP
DBSFL
DBSFL
DBSFLP
DBSFLP
BSFL4
BSFL4
Db n
BSFL4P
Db n
BSFL8
Db n
BSFL8P
BSFL8P
Db n
BSFR
BSFR
BSFRP
BSFRP
DBSFR
DBSFR
DBSFRP
DBSFRP
Move to Higher
Bit
0
b15
b0
CY
b31
(D+1, D)
CY
b+3
Db n
BSFR4P
Db n
BSFR8
Db n
BSFR8P
BSFR8P
Db n
WSFT
WSFT
Et Ed
WSFTP
WSFTP
Et Ed
4-109
2
3
3
0
CY
b+7
4-110
3
0
CY
b0
(D)
0
CY
3
4-111
b0
(D+1, D)
0
b+3
BSFR4
3
b0
b31
BSFR4
(D)
b15
Move to Lower
Bit
Page
CY
3
0
CY
b+7
4-112
3
0
h0000
Word Move
Bit Move
..
St (Start Word)
Ed (End Word)
4-113
D1
WSFL
D1 D2 N
WSFLP
WSFLP
D1 D2 N
D2
WSFR
WSFR
D1 D2 N
D1
WSFRP
WSFRP
D1 D2 N
..
WSFL
3
4-114
SR
SR
Db I D
3-21
h0000
..
Word Data
Move to
Left/Right
h0000
CY
D2
4-115
Designations
Symbol
XCHG
XCHG
XCHGP
XCHGP
D1 D2
DXCHG
DXCHG
D1 D2
(D2)
3
4-116
2
(D1+1, D1)
DXCHGP
Group
Data
Exchange
Higher/Lower
Byte
Exchange
Group
Byte
Exchange
Page
D1 D2
(D1)
Data
Exchange
Basic
Steps
Description
GXCHG
DXCHGP
GXCHG
D1 D2
D1 D2 N
(D1)
(D2)
:
GXCHGP
SWAP
SWAPP
GSWAP
GXCHGP
(D2+1, D2)
4-117
4-118
D1 D2 N
SWAP
SWAPP
GSWAP
b15
b0
(D)
Upper Byte
Lower Byte
(D)
Lower Byte
Upper Byte
2
Exchanges Higher/Lower
Byte of Words N starting from D
GSWAPP
GSWAPP
3-22
4-119
3
Designations
Symbol
ADD
AD D
S1 S2 D
ADDP
AD D P
S1 S2 D
DADD
D AD D
S1 S2 D
DADDP
D AD D P
S1 S2 D
SUB
SU B
S1 S2 D
SUBP
SU BP
S1 S2 D
DSUB
D SU B
S1 S2 D
DSUBP
D SU B P
S1 S2 D
MUL
M UL
S1 S2 D
MULP
M U LP
S1 S2 D
DMUL
DM UL
S1 S2 D
DMULP
D M U LP
S1 S2 D
DIV
D IV
S1 S2 D
DIVP
D IV P
S1 S2 D
DDIV
D D IV
S1 S2 D
DDIVP
D D IV P
S1 S2 D
ADDU
ADDU
S1 S2 D
ADDUP
ADDUP
S1 S2 D
DADDU
DADDU
S1 S2 D
DADDUP
DADDUP
S1 S2 D
SUBU
SUBU
S1 S2 D
SUBUP
SUBUP
S1 S2 D
DSUBU
DSUBU
S1 S2 D
DSUBUP
DSUBUP
S1 S2 D
MULU
MULU
S1 S2 D
MULUP
MULUP
S1 S2 D
DMULU
DMULU
S1 S2 D
DMULUP
DMULUP
S1 S2 D
(D)
(S1)+(S2)
Integer Addition
(Signed)
Integer
Multiplication
(Signed)
(D+1,D)
(D)
(D+1,D)
(S1)(S2)
(D+1,D)
4
4-122
(S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
(S1)(S2)
(D) Quotient
4
4-123
(S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
(D+3,D+2) Remainder
(D)
(S1)+(S2)
4
4-124
(S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2)
(D)
(S1)-(S2)
4
4-125
(S1+1,S1)-(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
Integer
Multiplication
(Unsigned)
(S1+1,S1)-(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
Integer
Subtraction
(Unsigned)
4-121
(D+1,D) Quotient
Integer Addition
(Unsigned)
(S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2)
(D+1) Remainder
Integer Division
(Signed)
Page
4-120
(S1)-(S2)
Integer
Subtraction
(Signed)
Basic
Steps
Description
(D+1,D)
(S1)(S2)
4
4-126
(S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
3-23
Designations
DIVU
Symbol
DIVU
S1 S2 D
(D) Quotient
(S1)(S2)
Integer Division
(Unsigned)
Basic
Steps
Description
DIVUP
DIVUP
S1 S2 D
DDIVU
DDIVU
S1 S2 D
DDIVUP
DDIVUP
S1 S2 D
RADD
RADD
S1 S2 D
RADDP
RADDP
S1 S2 D
LADD
LADD
S1 S2 D
LADDP
LADDP
S1 S2 D
RSUB
RSUB
S1 S2 D
RSUBP
RSUBP
S1 S2 D
LSUB
LSUB
S1 S2 D
LSUBP
LSUBP
S1 S2 D
RMUL
RMUL
S1 S2 D
RMULP
RMULP
S1 S2 D
LMUL
LMUL
S1 S2 D
LMULP
LMULP
S1 S2 D
RDIV
RDIV
S1 S2 D
RDIVP
RDIVP
S1 S2 D
LDIV
LDIV
S1 S2 D
LDIVP
LDIVP
S1 S2 D
$ADD
$ADD
S1 S2 D
$ADDP
$ADDP
S1 S2 D
(D+1) Remainder
4-127
4
(D+3,D+2) Remainder
(S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
4-128
(S1+3,S1+2,S1+1,S1)
+(S2+3,S2+2,S2+1,S2)
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
(S1+1,S1)-(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
Real Number
Subtraction
Real Number
Multiplication
4-129
(S1+3,S1+2,S1+1,S1)
-(S2+3,S2+2,S2+1,S2)
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
(S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
4-130
(S1+3,S1+2,S1+1,S1)
(S2+3,S2+2,S2+1,S2)
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
(S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
Real Number
Division
String
Addition
GADD
GADD
S1 S2 D
(S2+3,S2+2,S2+1,S2)
GADDP
S1 S2 D
GSUB
GSUB
S1 S2 D
(S1)
GSUBP
S1 S2 D
3-24
(D)
4-132
4
4-133
5
(S2)
(S1)
GSUBP
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
+
GADDP
4-131
(S1+3,S1+2,S1+1,S1)
Group Addition
Group
Subtraction
(S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D) Quotient
Real Number
Addition
Page
(D)
4
4-134
Designations
Symbol
Basic
Steps
Description
ADDB
ADDB
S1 S2 D
ADDBP
ADDBP
S1 S2 D
DADDB
DADDB
S1 S2 D
DADDBP
DADDBP
S1 S2 D
SUBB
SUBB
S1 S2 D
SUBBP
SUBBP
S1 S2 D
DSUBB
DSUBB
S1 S2 D
DSUBBP
DSUBBP
S1 S2 D
MULB
MULB
S1 S2 D
MULBP
MULBP
S1 S2 D
DMULB
DMULB
S1 S2 D
DMULBP
DMULBP
S1 S2 D
DIVB
DIVB
S1 S2 D
DIVBP
DIVBP
S1 S2 D
DDIVB
DDIVB
S1 S2 D
DDIVBP
DDIVBP
S1 S2 D
(D)
(S1)+(S2)
4
4-135
BCD Addition
(S1+1,S1)+(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
(D)
(S1)-(S2)
4
4-136
BCD Subtraction
BCD
Multiplication
Page
(S1+1,S1)-(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
(D+1,D)
(S1)(S2)
4
4-137
(S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
(D+3,D+2,D+1,D)
(S1)(S2)
(D) Quotient
(D+1) Remainder
BCD Division
4
4-138
(S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D) Quotient
3-25
(D+3,D+2) Remainder
Logic
Multiplication
Designations
Symbol
Basic
Steps
Description
WAND
WAND
S1 S2 D
WANDP
WANDP
S1 S2 D
DWAND
DWAND
S1 S2 D
DWANDP
DWANDP
S1 S2 D
WOR
WOR
S1 S2 D
WORP
WORP
S1 S2 D
DWOR
DWOR
S1 S2 D
DWORP
DWORP
S1 S2 D
WXOR
WXOR
S1 S2 D
WXORP
WXORP
S1 S2 D
DWXOR
DWXOR
S1 S2 D
DWXORP
DWXORP
S1 S2 D
WXNR
WXNR
S1 S2 D
WXNRP
WXNRP
S1 S2 D
DWXNR
DWXNR
S1 S2 D
DWXNRP
DWXNRP
S1 S2 D
Word AND
(S1) (S2)
(D)
4-139
DWord AND
(S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
Word OR
(S1) (S2)
(D)
4-141
Logic Addition
Exclusive
OR
Exclusive
NOR
DWord OR
(S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
Word Exclusive OR
(S1) (S2)
(D)
4-143
DWord Exclusive OR
(S1+1,S1)(S2+1,S2)
(D+1,D)
(D)
4-145
GWAND
Group
Logic Operation
Page
GWAND
S1 S2 D
(S1)
GWANDP
GWANDP
S1 S2 D
GWOR
GWOR
S1 S2 D
GWORP
S1 S2 D
GWXOR
GWXOR
S1 S2 D
GWXORP
S1 S2 D
GWXNR
GWXNR
S1 S2 D
(S2)
(S1)
GWXNRP
S1 S2 D
3-26
4
4-147
(D)
4
N
4-149
5
(S2)
(S1)
(D)
4
4-151
5
(S2)
(S1)
GWXNRP
GWXORP
(D)
GWORP
(D+1,D)
(D)
4
4-153
Designations
Symbol
BSUM
BSUM
BSUMP
BSUMP
DBSUM
DBSUM
DBSUMP
DBSUMP
BRST
B RST
BRSTP
B R S TP
Basic
Steps
Description
b0
b15
Bit Check
Bit Reset
S
1s number
b31
ENCO
ENCOP
ENCOP
DECO
DECO
Decode
1s number
Data
Search
Max. Value
Search
2 bits
S
...
DECOP
DIS
DIS
...
UNI
UNI
UNIP
UNIP
WTOB
WTOB
WTOBP
WTOBP
BTOW
BTOW
BTOWP
BTOWP
IORF
IO R F
S1 S2 S3
IORFP
IO R F P
S1 S2 S3
SCH
SCH
S1 S2 D
SCHP
SCHP
S1 S2 D
DSCH
DSCH
S1 S2 D
DSCHP
DSCHP
S1 S2 D
MAX
MAX
MAXP
MAXP
DMAX
DMAX
DMAXP
DMAXP
4-160
4-161
4-162
4-163
4-164
4-165
2 bits
...
..
...
...
D
D+1
D+N-1
...
D
D+1
D+N-1
D
D +1
...
DECOP
DISP
4-159
N bits
2binary
N bits
2binary
DISP
D
...
...
..
...
...
..
H igher Low er
S + N - 1 H igher Low er
I/O
Refresh
Word/
Byte
Convert
4-157
b0
b15
Encode
Data
Disconnect &
Connect
ENCO
Page
h00
h00
h00
h00
Lo w er
H igher
Low er
H igher
S
...
h00
h00
h00
h00
..
Low er D
H igher D + 1
Lo w er
H igher
H ig her Lo w er
H ig her Lo w er S + N - 1
4
4-166
4
4
5
4-167
4
5
4
4-169
3-27
Min. Value
Search
Designatio
ns
Description
Basic
Steps
Symbol
MIN
MIN
MINP
MINP
DMIN
DMIN
DMINP
DMINP
SUM
SUM
SUMP
SUMP
DSUM
DSUM
DSUMP
DSUMP
AVE
AVE
AVEP
AVEP
DAVE
DAVE
DAVEP
DAVEP
S1 S2 D
4-171
Saves the min value in D among N
double words starting from S
4
4-173
Sum
Adds up N double words starting
from S to save in D
4
4-175
Average
MUX
MUX
S1st data
MUXP
MUXP
S1 S2 D
DMUX
DMUX
S1 S2 D
DMUXP
DMUXP
S1 S2 D
DETECT
DETECT
S1 S2 D
DETECTP
DETECTP
S1 S2 D
4
D
MUX
4-177
S2+1
N
Data
Detect
Ramp Signal
Output
Page
RAMP
RAMP
n1 n2 D1 n3 D2
SORT
SORT
S n1 n2 D1 D2
Data
Align
SORTP
SORTP
S n1 n2 D1 D2
S2
S1st data
D+1
4
D
5
Detects N data from S1, to save the
first value larger than S2 in D, and
the extra number in D+1
4
4-179
5
4-180
4-182
3-28
Data
Write
First-input
Data
Read
Last-Input
Data
Read
Designations
Symbol
Description
FIWR
FIWR
FIWRP
FIWRP
FIFRD
FIFRD
FIFRDP
FIFRDP
FILRD
FILRD
FILRDP
FILRDP
FIINS
FINS
Data
Insert
Data
Pull
FIINSP
FINSP
FIDEL
FDEL
FIDELP
FDELP
Basic
Steps
Page
2
4-184
3
2
4-186
3
2
4-187
3
4-188
4-189
Description
Basic
Steps
Page
4-155
Designations
Symbol
SEG
SEG
SEGP
SEGP
3-29
Convert to
Decimal
ASCII
Cord
Convert to
Hexadecimal
ASCII
Cord
Convert BCD
to Decimal
ASCII
Cord
Designations
BINDA
BINDAP
BINDAP
DBINDA
DBINDA
DBINDAP
DBINDAP
BINHA
BINHA
BINHAP
BINHAP
DBINHA
DBINHA
DBINHAP
DBINHAP
BCDDA
BCDDA
BCDDAP
BCDDAP
DBCDDA
DBCDDA
DBCDDAP
DBCDDAP
DABIN
DABIN
DABINP
DDABIN
DDABINP
DDABINP
HABIN
HABIN
HABINP
HABINP
DHABIN
DHABIN
DHABINP
DHABINP
DABCD
DABCD
DABCDP
DDABCD
DDABCDP
DDABCDP
LEN
LEN
LENP
LENP
Basic
Steps
Page
2
3
4-190
2
3
2
3
4-192
2
3
2
3
4-194
2
3
2
3
4-196
2
3
2
3
4-198
DABCDP
Convert
Decimal ASCII
to BCD
DDABCD
String
Length Detect
Description
BINDA
DABINP
Convert
Decimal ASCII
to BIN
DDABIN
Convert
Hexadecimal
ASCII to BIN
Symbol
2
3
2
3
4-200
3-30
2
3
2
4-202
3
Convert String to
BIN16/32
Designations
STR
STR
S1 S2 D
STRP
STRP
S1 S2 D
DSTR
DSTR
S1 S2 D
DSTRP
DSTRP
S1 S2 D
VAL
VAL
S D1 D2
VALP
VALP
S D1 D2
DVAL
DVAL
S D1 D2
DVALP
DVALP
S D1 D2
RSTR
S1 S2 D
RSTRP
RSTRP
S1 S2 D
LSTR
LS T R
S1 S2 D
LSTRP
LS T R P
S1 S2 D
ASCII Convert
HEX Convert
Symbol
STRR
STRR
STRRP
STRRP
STRL
S TR L
STRLP
S T R LP
ASC
ASC
D cw
ASCP
ASC P
D cw
HEX
HEX
HEXP
HEXP
RIGHT
RIGHT
RIGHTP
RIGHTP
LEFT
LEFT
LEFTP
LEFTP
MID
M ID
S1 S2 D
MIDP
M ID P
S1 S2 D
3-31
Description
Basic
Steps
Page
4-203
4-205
4
4
4-207
4
2
4-209
2
4-211
4-213
4-215
4-215
Extracts
string
which
conforms to S2 condition
among S1 string to save in
starting D
4-217
String Random
Replace
Designations
REPLACE
REPLACEP
Symbol
R E P LA C E S 1 D S 2
R E P LA C E P S 1 D S 2
FIND
F IN D
S1 S2 D
FINDP
F IN D
S1 S2 D
String Find
Parse Real
Number to BCD
Convert BCD
Data to Real
Number
RBCD
RBCD
S1 S2 D
RBCDP
RBCDP
S1 S2 D
LBCD
LB C D
S1 S2 D
LBCDP
LB C D P
S1 S2 D
BCDR
BCDR
S1 S2 D
BCDRP
BCDRP
S1 S2 D
BCDL
BCDR
S1 S2 D
BCDLP
BCDRP
S1 S2 D
3-32
Description
Basic
Steps
Page
Processes
S1
String
as
applicable to S2 Condition to
save in D String
4-218
4-220
4-221
4
4-223
4
Designations
SIN
Symbol
SIN
Description
S
COS
Operation
SINP
COS
COS
COSP
TAN
TAN
(D+1,D)
4-226
3
2
(D+1,D)
TANP
ATANP
ATANP
RAD
RAD
RADP
RADP
DEG
DEG
DEGP
DEGP
SQRT
SQR
SQRTP
SQRP
LNP
LNP
(S+1,S)
(D+1,D)
Converts angle to radian
RAD Convert
4-227
2
4-228
3
(S+1,S)
(D+1,D)
Converts radian to angle
Angle Convert
Square Root
Operation
4-225
TAN(S+1,S)
(D+1,D)
COS(S+1,S)
COSP
Page
2
SIN(S+1,S)
SIN Operation
SINP
Basic
Steps
2
4-229
3
(S+1,S)
3-33
(D+1,D)
2
4-230
Designations
Symbol
Description
LIMIT
LIMIT
S1 S2 S3 D
LIMITP
LIMITP
S1 S2 S3 D
Basic
Steps
Page
4
If S1 < S2, then
Limit
Control
D = S2
4-231
D = S1
DLIMIT
DLIMIT
S1 S2 S3 D
DLIMITP
DLIMITP
S1 S2 S3 D
DZONE
D ZO N E
S1 S2 S3 D
DZONEP
D ZO N EP
S1 S2 S3 D
Dead-zone
Control
DDZONE
D D ZO N E
S1 S2 S3 D
DDZONEP
D D ZO N EP S1 S2 S3 D
VZONE
VZ O N E
VZONEP
VZ O N E P
S1 S2 S3 D
DVZONE
D VZ O N E
S1 S2 S3 D
DVZONEP
D VZ O N E P S 1 S 2 S 3 D
4-235
4
5
4-239
4-240
4-241
P ID P A U S E N
PIDINIT
PIDPAUSE
PIDINIT
4
If S1 < -S2(S3/100), then
D = S1-S2+S2(S3/100)
If S2(S3/100) <S1< S2(S3/100),
then
D = (100/S3)S1
If S1 < S2(S3/100), then
D = S1+S2-S2(S3/100)
4-237
P ID R U N
P ID P R M T
4-233
PIDRUN
PIDPRMT
S1 S2 S3 D
Vertical-zone
Control
Built-in
PID Control
Instruction
3-34
Designations
Description
Basic
Steps
Page
4-242
Input
S ~ S+6s Time Data in PLC
(Yr/Mn/Dt/Hr/Mn/Sd/Day)
4-243
4-244
4-245
Symbol
Date/Time
Data
Read
DATERD
DATERD
DATERDP
DATERDP
Date/Time
Data
Write
DATEWR
DATEWR
DATEWRP
DATEWRP
ADDCLK
ADDCLK
S1 S2 D
Time Data
Increase
ADDCLKP
ADDCLKP
S1 S2 D
SUBCLK
SUBCLK
S1 S2 D
SUBCLKP
SUBCLKP
S1 S2 D
Time Data
Decrease
SECOND
SECOND
SECONDP
SEC O N D P S
HOUR
HOUR
HOURP
HOURP
4-246
3
2
4-247
3
Designations
Symbol
JMP
JMP
Description
LABEL
Diverge
Instruction
Basic
Steps
RETURN
Page
4-248
LABEL
LABEL
CALL
CALL
LABEL
CALLP
CALLP
LABEL
Subroutine
Call Functional
4-249
SBRT
RET
SBRT
LABEL
RET
3-35
Designations
Symbol
FO R
FOR
Loop
Instruction
Description
N
Basic
Steps
2
N EXT
BREAK
B REAK
Page
4-250
1
4-251
Basic
Steps
Page
Designations
Symbol
Description
STC
S TC
CLC
C LC
CLE
C LE
4-253
Basic
Steps
Page
Self Diagnosis
(Error Display )
4-254
4-255
4-256
4-257
4-258
4-259
4-260
4-261
Basic
Steps
Page
4-252
Designations
Error Display
FALS
Scan Cluck
DUTY
Time Cluck
TFLK
WDT
Initialize
Symbol
F A LS
D U TY
TFLK
D n1 n2
D1 S1 S2 D2
WDT
W DT
WDTP
W D TP
Description
O U TO F F
S TO P
STOP
Emergent
ESTOP
Operation Stop
Initialization Task
INIT_DONE
End
E S TO P
IN IT _D O N E
Designations
All Channels
Interrupt
Setting
EI
EI
DI
DI
Individual
Channel
Interrupt
Setting
Symbol
Description
4-262
EIN
E IN
DIN
D IN
4-263
3-36
2s
complement
Real Number
Data Sign
Reverse
Absolute Value
Operation
Designations
Description
Basic
Steps
Symbol
NEG
NEG
NEGP
NEGP
DNEG
DNEG
DNEGP
DNEGP
RNEG
RNEG
RNEGP
RNEGP
LNEGR
LNEG
LNEGP
LNEGP
ABS
ABS
ABSP
ABSP
DABS
DABS
DABSP
DABSP
Page
4-264
Saves (D+1,D) value again in (D+1,D)
with 2s complement taken
2
4-265
2
4-266
Converts (D+1,D)
highest Bit to 0
Designations
RSET
RSET
RSETP
R S E TP
EMOV
Basic
Steps
Page
4-267
Block Convert
Flash
Word Data
Transfer
Description
Symbol
EM O V
S1 S2 D
EMOVP
E M O VP
S1 S2 D
Flash
Double Word
Data
Transfer
EDMOV
ED M O V
S1 S2 D
Block Read
EBREAD
EB READ
Block Write
EBWRITE
4-268
EDMOVP
Block
Compare
EBCMP
Block Error
Clear
EERRST
S1 S2
4-269
E B W R IT E S 1 S 2
4-270
4-271
4-272
ED M O VP
EB C M P
S1 S2 D
S1 S2 D 1 D 2
PIDINIT
3-37
F area
Control
instruction
Designations
Symbol
Description
Basic
Steps
Page
FSET
FSET
4-273
FRST
FRST
4-274
2~3
4-275
FWRITE
FWRITE
3-38
Designations
Basic
Steps
Page
4-280
n1 n2 n3 n4 n5
4-281
n1 n2 n3 n4 n5
4-282
n1 n2 n3 n4 n5
4-283
n1 n2 n3 n4 n5
4-284
Basic
Steps
Page
P 2P S N
Description
Symbol
P 2P W R D
P 2P W W R
P 2P B R D
P 2P B W R
n1 n2 n3
Designations
GET
Special
Module
Read/Write
Symbol
GET
sl S
Description
D
GETP
GETP
sl S
PUT
PU T
sl S 1 S 2 N
P U TP
4
4-276
5
4
module
module
sl S 1 S 2 N
4-278
5
Designations
GETM
Symbol
GET
sl S
Description
GETMP
GETP
sl S
PUTM
PU T
sl S 1 S 2 N
Basic
Steps
Page
4
4-331
5
Motion Module
Read/Write
PUTMP
P U TP
sl S 1 S 2 N
3-39
4
4-333
5
Designations
Symbol
Basic
Steps
Page
4-285
4-286
4-287
4-288
Description
Instructions Positioning Modules ax
axis installed on sl slot to return to
Origin Point
Instructions Positioning Modules ax
axis installed on sl slot to set
Floating Origin Point
Instructions Positioning Modules ax
axis installed on sl slot to start
directly with Target Position(n1),
Target Speed(n2), Dwell Time(n3),
M Code(n4) & Control Word(n5)
Return to Origin
Point
ORG
O RG
sl ax
Floating Origin
Point
FLT
F LT
sl ax
Direct Start
DST
Indirect Start
IST
Linear
Interpolation
LIN
LIN
sl ax n1 n 2
4-289
Circular
Interpolation
CIN
C IN
sl ax n1 n 2
4-290
Simultaneous
Start
SST
sl ax n1 n2 n3 n4
4-291
4-292
DST
sl ax n1 n2 n3 n4 n5
IS T
SST
sl ax n
Speed/Position
Control Switch
VTP
V TP
sl ax
Position/Speed
Control Switch
PTV
P TV
sl ax
4-293
S TP
sl ax
4-294
SKP
sl ax
4-295
sl ax n1 n 2 n3
4-296
sl ax n1 n 2 n3
4-297
4-298
Skip
Position
Synchronization
Speed
Synchronization
Position
Override
SKP
SSP
SSS
POR
SSP
SSS
PO R
sl ax n
3-40
Speed
Override
Designations
Description
Basic
Steps
Page
sl ax n
4-299
sl ax n
4-300
4-301
4-302
4-303
Symbol
SO R
SOR
Position specified
Speed
PSO
Override
PSO
Continuous
Operation
NMV
Inching
INCH
Return to Position
Previous to Manual
Operation
RTP
Operation
Step Change
SNS
SN S
sl ax n
4-304
Repeated
Operation
Step Change
SRS
SRS
sl ax n
4-305
M Code
Off
MOF
4-306
Present Position
Change
PRS
4-307
Zone
Allowed
ZOE
ZO E
sl ax
4-308
Zone
Prohibited
ZOD
ZO D
sl ax
4-309
4-310
Encoder Value
change
NM V
IN C H
R TP
MOF
PRS
EPRS
EPRS
sl a x
sl ax n
sl ax
sl ax
sl ax n
sl ax n
Teaching
TEA
TEA
sl ax n1 n2 n3 n4
4-311
Teaching
Array
TEAA
TEAA
sl ax n1 n2 n3 n4
4-312
Emergent Stop
EMG
4-313
EM G
sl ax
3-41
Error Reset
Error
History
Reset
Designations
CLR
Symbol
C LR
ECLR
sl ax n
E C LR
sl ax
Description
Basic
Steps
Page
4-314
4-315
4-316
Point
Operation
PST
Basic Parameter
Teaching
TBP
TB P
sl ax n1 n 2
4-317
Extended
Parameter
Teaching
TEP
TE P
sl ax n1 n 2
4-319
Return to Origin
Point Parameter
Teaching
THP
TH P
sl ax n1 n 2
4-321
Manual
Operation
Parameter
Teaching
TMP
TM P
sl ax n1 n 2
4-323
Input Signal
Parameter
Teaching
TSP
4-324
Common
Parameter
Teaching
TCP
4-325
Parameter
Save
WRT
W RT
sl ax n
4-327
Present State
Read
SRD
SRD
sl a x D
4-328
Point Operation
Step Write
PWR
PW R
sl a x S n 1
4-329
Plural Teaching
Data
Write
TWR
TW R
sl a x S n 1
4-330
PST
TS P
TC P
sl ax n
sl ax n
sl ax n1 n 2
3-42
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
PMK
Step
1/2
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
LOAD S
LOAD NOT S
LOADP S
LOADN S
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
Description
Bit devices contact / Word devices bit contact
Data Type
BIT
Remark
(1) S areas bit specified is displayed in Hexadecimal. Namely, Dxxxxx.0 ~ Dxxxxx.F available.
For example, D00010.A means 10th Bit of word applicable to D10.
(2) For LOAD/AND/OR Instruction, index formula is available for Operand.
- LOAD P1[Z2] stands for LOAD P (1+[Z2] value) and LOAD D10[Z1].5 for LOAD D (10+[Z1]).5
- What is different is that index formula is added to bit value since P device is of bit, while index formula is
added to word value since D device is of word.
(3) LOAD/LOAD NOT Instruction if used with index formula increases the number of steps by 1. And the number of
steps becomes 2 steps.
(4) It influences Error flag (F110) when Index formula is used in contact instruction.
4-1
P00060
P00020
P00061
D00020.3
P00062
2
4
P
D00020.3
(
b15
b3
1/0
[Mnemonic Program]
Mnemonic
LOAD
OUT
LOAD NOT
OUT
LOADP
OUT
LOADN
OUT
Operand
P00020
P00060
P00020
P00061
D00020.3
P00062
D00020.3
P00063
[Time Chart]
P00020
P00060
P00061
D00020.3
P00062
P00063
P00063
D20
Step
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
1Scan
ON
1Scan
4-2
)
b0
Con
U
D.x R.x
st.
PMK
Step
1/2
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
AND S1
AND NOT S1
ANDP S1
ANDN S1
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
Description
Data Type
BIT
[Mnemonic Program]
P00060
P00061
Step
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Mnemonic
LOAD
AND
AND NOT
OUT
LOAD
ANDP
ANDN
OUT
Operand
P00020
P00021
P00022
P00060
D00020.3
P00023
P00024
P00061
Remark
(1) AND/AND NOT Instruction if used with index formula increases the number of steps by 1.
4-3
OR
Cons
U
D.x R.x
t.
PMK
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
1/2
S1
OR NOT S1
ORP S 1
ORN S 1
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
Description
Data Type
BIT
1) OR, OR NOT
(1) OR is 1 contacts A contact parallel-connected instruction, and OR NOT is B contact parallel-connected
instruction.
(2) OR or OR NOT operation of previous operation result and specified contact (S1) is regarded as its result.
2) ORP, ORN
(1) ORP is A contact parallel-connected instruction at Rising Pulse, and ORN is B contact parallel-connected
instruction at Falling Pulse.
(2) When applicable contact changes, in other words, when ORP is at Rising Pulse and ORN is at Falling
Pulse, OR or OR NOT operation of previous operation result and specified contact (S1) is regarded as its
result.
3) Program Example
(1) Where even if one input condition between P020 and P021 contacts is On, P061 is Output.
[Ladder Program]
[Mnemonic Program]
P00020
Step
0
1
2
P00022
Mnemonic
LOAD
OR
OUT
Operand
P00020
P00021
P00022
P00021
OR
P00021
Remark
(1) OR/OR NOT Instruction if used with index formula increases the number of steps by 1.
4-4
2) System Diagram
3) Program Example
[Ladder Program]
P00031
P00030
P00032
P00061
P00060
*1)
P00060
P00032
P00030
P00031
P00060
P00061
6
P00061
12
END
[Mnemonic Program]
Step
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Mnemonic
LOAD
OR
AND NOT
AND NOT
AND NOT
OUT
LOAD
OR
AND NOT
AND NOT
AND NOT
OUT
END
Operand
P00031
P00060
P00030
P00032
P00061
P00060
P00032
P00061
P00030
P00031
P00060
P00061
4-5
*2)
P00061
P00060
Remark
P00030
P00060
0
P00060
(1) P00031 if On makes Output P00060 On, which makes self-used input a contact P00060 On and
keeps the On state till P00030 signal is input. Such a circuit is called Self Holding Circuit.
4-6
PMK
Con
U
D.x R.x
st.
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
AND LOAD
B Block
A Block
1) Function
(1) It performs AND Operation of A Block and B Block.
(2) If AND LOAD is continuously used, normal operation is not available when the max. usable number is
exceeded.
(3) Up to 15 times (16 blocks) available if continuously used.
2) Program Example
(1) Where Input Condition P00020, P00024 or P00020, P00025 or P00022, P00026 is On, P00060 is Output.
[Ladder Program]
P00020
[Mnemonic Program]
P00023 P00024
P00026 P00060
0
P00021
P00025
P00022
AND LOAD
[Time Chart]
P00020 OFF ON
P00022
P00026
P00060
OFF
ON
OFF ON
OFF
ON
4-7
Step
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mnemonic
LOAD
OR NOT
OR
LOAD NOT
AND
OR
AND LOAD
AND NOT
OUT
Operand
P00020
P00021
P00022
P00023
P00024
P00025
P00026
P00060
M00002
M00004
M00006
M00008
M00001
M00003
M00005
M00007
M00009
P00050
END
M00000
OR
M00001
LOAD
M00002
OR
M00003
LOAD
OR
LOAD
OR
LOAD
OR
LOAD
OR
LOAD
OR
AND LOAD
AND LOAD
AND LOAD
AND LOAD
OUT
END
AND LOAD
LOAD
M00004
OR
M00005
AND LOAD
*
LOAD
M00006
OR
M00007
AND LOAD
LOAD
M00008
OR
M00009
M00000
M00001
M00002
M00003
M00004
M00005
M00006
M00007
M00008
M00009
P00060
AND LOAD
OUT
P00060
END
Limited to 30 circuits: (Contact + coil)
up to 32 available
If used continuously, up to
15 instructions (16 blocks) available
Remark
1) In SoftLogic-200, the program above if made by Ladder and displayed by Mnemonic will be of unlimited
application times of AND LOAD.
4-8
PMK
Con
U
D.x R.x
st.
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
A block
OR LOAD
B block
1) OR LOAD
(1) Performs OR operation of A Block and B Block to get the result.
(2) If OR LOAD is continuously used, normal operation is not available when the maximum usable number is
exceeded.
(3) Up to 15 times (16 blocks) available if continuously used.
2) Program Example
(1) Where Input condition P00020, P00025 or P00024, P00025 is On, P00060 and P00061 is output
[Ladder Program]
P00020
P00022
P00023
P00024
[Mnemonic Program]
P00025
P00060
P00026 P00061
OR LOAD
[Time Chart]
P00020
P00024
P00025
P00060
P00061
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
4-9
Step
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Mnemonic
LOAD
AND NOT
OR NOT
AND
OR LOAD
AND
OUT
AND NOT
OUT
Operand
P00020
P00022
P00023
P00024
P00025
P00060
P00026
P00061
M00001
M00002
M00003
M00004
M00005
M00006
M00007
M00008
M00009
P00006
END
16
M00000
AND
M00001
LOAD
M00002
AND
M00003
LOAD
AND
LOAD
AND
LOAD
AND
LOAD
AND
LOAD
AND
OR LOAD
OR LOAD
OR LOAD
OR LOAD
OUT
END
OR LOAD
LOAD
M00004
AND
M00005
OR LOAD
LOAD
M00006
AND
M00007
OR LOAD
LOAD
M00008
AND
M00009
OR LOAD
OUT
M00000
M00001
M00002
M00003
M00004
M00005
M00006
M00007
M00008
M00009
P00060
P00060
END
If used continuously, up to 15
instructions (16 blocks) available
Remark
1) In SoftLogic-200, the program above if made by Ladder and displayed by Mnemonic will be of unlimited
application times of OR LOAD.
4-10
PMK
Con
U
D.x R.x
st.
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
MPUSH
MLOAD
MPOP
MPUSH
MLOAD
MLOAD
MPOP
M00001
P00060
M00002
P00061
M00003
P00062
M00004
P00063
4-11
P00021
P00022
P00023
P00024
P00060
P00025
P00061
P00026
P00062
00000
P00027
P00063
P00028
P00064
P00029
P00065
P0002A
P00066
00027
END
[Mnemonic Program]
Step
Mnemonic
Operand
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
0018
0019
0020
0021
0022
0023
0024
LOAD
MPUSH
AND
MPUSH
AND
AND
MPUSH
AND
OUT
MLOAD
AND
OUT
MPOP
AND
OUT
MLOAD
AND
OUT
MPOP
AND
OUT
MLOAD
AND
OUT
MPOP
P00200
P00021
P00022
P00023
P00024
P00060
P00025
P00061
P00026
P00062
P00027
P00063
P00028
P00064
P00029
P00065
P0002A
P00066
4-12
PMK
Con
U
D.x R.x
st.
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
NOT
1) NOT
(1) NOT reverses the previous result.
(2) If Reverse Instruction(NOT) is used, A contact circuit is reversed to B contact circuit, B contact circuit to A
contact circuit, and series-connected circuit is reversed to parallel-connected circuit, parallel-connected
circuit to series-connected circuit for the left circuit of Reverse Instruction.
2) Program Example
Program and outputs the same result.
[Program ]
P00020
P00021
P00022
P00023
P00024
P00060
[Program ]
P00060
P00020
P00021
P00022
P00023
P00024
4-13
PMK
Con
U
D.x R.x
st.
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Instruction
MCS
MCSCLR
[Area Setting]
Operand
n
MCS
MCSCLR
Description
Up to 0~15 available to set integer and n(Nesting).
Data Type
WORD(0~15)
1) MCS, MCSCLR
(1) If MCSs input condition is On, up to MCSCLR identical to MCS number will be executed. And if input
condition is Off, nothing will be executed.
(2) Priority is that MCS number 0 is the highest, 15 the lowest, which should be used in priority sequence.
Clearing will be to the contrary.
(3) MCSCLR clearing of high priority data will also clear MCS Block with low priority.
(4) MCS or MCSCLR should be used in priority sequence.
2) Program Example
Where 2 MCS Instructions are used and 0 with high priority is used for MCSCLR Instruction.
4-14
4-15
4-16
PMK
Con
U
D.x R.x
st.
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
OUT
OUT NOT
1/2
OUTP
OUTN
OUT D
OUT NOT D
OUTP D
OUTN D
[Area Setting]
Operand
D
Description
Contact to be On/Off / Word devices bit contact.
Data Type
BIT
4-17
[Mnemonic Program]
P00032
M00002
P
M00002
P00060
Step
0
1
2
3
4
3
P00060
Nnemonic
LOAD
OUTP
LOAD
OR
OUT
Operand
P00032
M00002
M00002
P00060
P00060
[Time Chart]
P00032
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
1 Scan On
M00002
P00060
1 Scan On
Dotted line is P00060 output part via self-holding
(2) OUTN Example: performs D Instruction when input contact P00032 changes Off to On.
[Ladder Program]
[Mnemonic Program]
P00033
M00003
N
0
M00003
Step
0
1
2
3
4
P00061
3
P00061
Nnemonic
Operand
LOAD
OUTN
LOAD
OR
OUT
P00033
M00003
M00003
P00061
P00061
[Time Chart]
P00033
ON
OFF
<-
->
M00003
OFF
ON
<- 1 Scan On
->
P00061 OFF
1 Scan On
ON
Remark
1) Since OUTP, OUTN Instructions are On only for1 scan based on applicable input condition, Output to P area
needs careful attention.
4-18
PB0
P
r
o
g
r
a
m
1
2
3
.
On/Off repeated
1
2
.
.
[Ladder Program]
[Mnemonic Program]
P00000
M00002
P
P00060 M00000
P00060
2
P00060 M00000
END
[Time Chart]
P00000
P00060
OFF
ON
OFF ON
4-19
Step
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Nnemonic
LOAD
OUTP
LOAD
AND NOT
LOAD NOT
AND
OR LOAD
OUT
END
Operand
P00000
M00000
P00060
M00000
P00060
M00000
P00060
PMK
Con
U
D.x R.x
st.
O O
O
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
SET
[Area Setting]
Operand
D
Description
Data Type
BIT
1) SET
(1) If input condition is On, output is kept On although specified output contact is kept On to make Input Off. If
specified output contact is of Word devices bit contact, its applicable bit should be 1.
(2) Contact if On by SET Instruction can be Off by RST Instruction.
(3) Refer to 4.6 Subsequent Input Sequence Preferred Instruction for details on SET Syy.xx.
2) Program Example
(1) Where the state of P00060 & P00061 is checked when input contact P00020 changes Off On.
[Ladder Program]
[Mnemonic Program]
P00020
P00060
P00020
P00061
S
Step
0
1
2
3
0
2
[Time Chart]
P00020
P00060
P00061
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
4-20
Mnemonic
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
SET
Operand
P00 0 20
P00 0 60
P00 0 20
P00 0 61
PMK
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
RST
[Area Setting]
Operand
D
Description
Data Type
BIT
1) RST
(1) If input condition is On, output is kept Off although specified output contact is kept Off to make Input Off. If
specified output contact is of Word devices bit contact, its applicable bit should be 0.
2) Program Example
(1) Where the output state of P00060 & P00061 is checked and P00061 output is made Off when input
condition P00020 changes On Off.
[Ladder Program]
0
[Mnemonic Program]
P00020
P00060
P00020
P00061
S
P00021
P00061
R
Step
0
1
2
3
4
5
Mnemonic
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
SET
LOAD
RST
Operand
P00020
P00060
P00020
P00061
P00021
P00061
[Time Chart]
P00020
P00021
P00060
P00061
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
4-21
On
Off
P00060
On
P00060
On
Off
Off
P00060
K00000
K00000
K00000
Self- keep
(2) Differences in operation between Input/Output Relay(P) and Keep Relay(K) areas at SET/RST Instruction
Set/Reset Instructions have Self-Keep function to keep the state once when Output is set (On) till Off input
comes in. However, because of differences between Input/Output Relay(P) Area and Keep Relay(K) Area,
the operation after power recovered will be different.
On
Off
P00060
S
K00000
S
P00060
S
K00000
S
4-22
PMK
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
O
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
FF
FF
[Area Setting]
Operand
D
Description
Bit devices contact / Word devices bit contact
Data Type
BIT
1) FF
(1) Reverses specified devices state when input contact changes Off On by Bit Output Reverse Instruction.
2) Program Example
(1) Where P0060 state is reversed when input contact P0020 is changed from Off to On.
[Ladder Program]
P00020
0
FF
P00060
END
[Mnemonic Program]
[Time Chart]
P00020
OFF
ON
P00060
OFF
ON
4-23
PMK
[Area Setting]
Operand
Syy.xx
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Description
Data Type
BIT
[Mnemonic Program]
P00030
S01.01
S
P00031
S01.02
S
P00032
S01.00
S
0
2
4
Step
0
1
2
3
4
5
Mnemonic
LOAD
SET
LOAD
SET
LOAD
SET
Operand
P00030
S01.01
P00031
S01.02
P00032
S01.00
RESET
(2) Sequence Control will be output if the previous step is On and its own condition contact is On.
[Time Chart]
P00030
P00031
P00032
Input condition contact to clear S01
S01.01
S01.02
4-24
[Time Chart]
OFF
ON
S00.01
OFF
ON
Process
1 End
OFF
ON
S00.02 OFF
ON
Start
Process
2 End
OFF
ON
S00.03 OFF
ON
Process
OFF
3 End
Emergent OFF
stop
S00.00
ON
ON
ON
OFF
4-25
PMK
[Area Setting]
Operand
Syy.xx
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Description
Data Type
BIT
[Mnemonic Program]
P00020
S02.01
P00021
S02.23
P00022
S02.99
P00023
S02.00
Step
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Mnemonic
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
OUT
Operand
P00020
S02.01
P00021
S02.23
P00022
S02.98
P00023
S02.00
S02.23
S02.98
END
No
P00020
P00021
P00022
P00023
S02.01
On
Off
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
Off
On
On
On
Off
On
On
On
On
4-26
S02.00
On
On
On
PMK
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
END
END
1) END
(1) Displays Program End.
(2) Returns to 0000 Step to process after END Instruction is processed.
(3) END Instruction should be surely input last in program. If not input, Missing End Error will occur.
Remark
What is 1 scan?
As shown below; A cycle of Input Refresh User Program Executed Self Diagnosis Output Refresh is 1 scan.
Input Refresh
0000
0001
LOAD
AND
P00020
P00021
1scan
4-27
PMK
NOP
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
1) NOP
(1) It means No Operation Instruction which has no effect on operation result of applicable circuit till then.
(2) Only used in Mnemonic Program.
(3) NOP is used to debug sequence program and to clear instruction while keeping the number of steps
temporarily.
2) Program Example
(1) Where steps are increased if Mnemonic Program is changed to Ladder Program with NOP Instruction used.
[Mnemonic Program]
Step
Mnemonic
Operand
LOAD
P00020
AND
P00021
NOP
OUT
P00060
LOAD
P00022
OUT
P00061
END
[Ladder Program]
Remark
1) Instruction process time of NOP Instruction differs based on unit type. However, the program process time Scan
time) can be reduced by clearing the instruction which needs time to process.
2) NOP Instruction can not be input from Ladder, and NOP registered in Mnemonic will not be displayed on the
Ladder screen but the number of steps displayed as included.
4-28
Designations
TON
ON Timer
TOFF
OFF Timer
TMR
Integral
Timer
TMON
Monostable
Timer
TRTG
Retrigger
Timer
Operation characteristics
If input condition is ON, Timer Contact Output OFF
When Timers present value reaches setting value, Timer Contact Output will be
ON
If input condition is ON, present value will be setting value and Timer Contact
output ON.
If present value decreases to 0, Timer Contact Output OFF
Even if input condition is OFF, present value is kept
if accumulated timer value reaches setting value, Timer Contact Output ON
If input condition is ON, present value will be setting value and Timer Contact
Output ON
Even if input condition is OFF and present value still decreases to 0, contact
Output OFF
Same function as Monostable Timer. If input condition is again ON when present
value decreases, the present value will be again setting value to start operation.
(3) Up to 2,048 Timers can be used regardless of its type, and the setting value range available is 0~65, 535.
Repeated use of the same timer number is impossible. If the same timer number is used repeatedly regardless of
index used, it will be processed as repeated use, which makes Program Download unavailable.
(4) Timer value setting available device (Operand available) is integers of P, M, K, U, D, R, etc. with index functions
available. However, at this moment available index range is Z0 ~ Z3.
(5) In order to reset Timer, turn input contact OFF or use reset coil. While reset coil is ON, Timer dose not operate.
(6) If Reset Instruction is used to reset Timer, be sure to input in the same format as used in Timer format as shown
below; If TON T0001[Z000] D00010[Z003] is used, Timer format used in reset coil should be T0001[Z000], or
program error will occur in SoftLogic-200 to make Program Download unavailable.
(7) Timer makes present value updated and contact ON/OFF after END Instruction executed. Thus, Timer Instruction
may make operational error. Refer to Appendix 2. Measurement and Precision of Timer for details.
4-29
Remark
1) Due to index function, timers with different characteristics if operated at a time will be executed individually to
produce abnormal operation. If index function is to be used, pay attention to this.
4-30
TON
PMK
O
-
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2/3
Input Condition
TO N
TO N
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
Input signal
Timer contact
point output
(Increased)
2) Program Example
(1) In 20 sec after P00020 is On, when Timers present value is the same as setting, T0097 will be On, and
P00065 is On.
(2) If input condition is Off before present value reaches setting value, present value will be 0. If P00021 is On,
T0097 will be Off and present value 0.
[Ladder Program]
[Mnemonic Program]
P00020
TON
T0097
T0097
Step
0
1
200
P00065
3
4
5
6
3
T0097
R
P00021
5
[Time Chart]
P00020
t = 20 sec
P00065
4-31
Mnemonic
LOAD
TON
Operand
P00020
T0097
LOAD
OUT
LOAD
RST
T0097
P00065
P00021
T0097
200
Output module
P00006
Start
Program
3
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
F
[Time Chart]
P00002
T0
T1
P00060
[Program]
4-32
L
LAMP
TOFF
PMK
O
-
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2/3
TOFF
TOFF
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
Timer contact
point output
(Dcreased)
2) Program Example
(1) If input P00020 contact is On, T0000 contact is On at the same time and Output P00065 is On.
(2) After input P00020 is Off, Timer starts to decrease. And if present value is 0, Timer Contact will be Off.
(3) If P00022 is On, present value will be 0.
[Ladder Program]
P00020
TOFF T0000 5
T0000
P00065
P00022
T0000
(R)
[Time Chart]
P00020
t=5
P00065
4-33
[Ladder Program]
P00020
0000
P00060
0004
P00020
0006
TON T0000 50
T0000
0010
TON T0011 50
T0000
P00061
0014
T0011
0017
P00020
0021
TON T0001 10
T0001
P00020
P00062
0024
END
[Time Chart]
Operation
(P00020)
OFF
ON
A(P00060)
OFF
ON
B(P00061)
C(P00062)
T0000
OFF
OFF
T0000 : 5 sec.
T0000
T0001
ON
ON
4-34
T0001 : 10 sec.
T0011
T0010 : 10 sec.
T0011 : 5 sec.
TMR
PMK
O
-
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2/3
TMR
TMR
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
t2
t1
(Increased)
Setting time ( t ) = t1 + t2
2) Program Example
(1) Where contact P0020 is repeatedly On, Off and On then to make T0096 On and Output contact P0061 On
(t1 + t2 = 30sec).
(2) If Reset Signal P0023 is On, present value will be 0 and P0061 Off.
[Ladder Program]
[Time Chart]
P00023
P00020
Setting
T0096
(Present )
t = 20
t = 10
P00061
4-35
Motor
Exchange circuit
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
Program
(Measures tool
used time)
F
Address
P00020
P00021
P00060
T0000
0
1
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
F
Description
Drill Downward Detected
Drill Exchange Compete
Toolss Life Alarm
Toolss Life Setting Timer
[Ladder Program]
The Accumulating Timer shown above is recommended to be of the type in non-volatile area.
(Timer used here is in volatile area)
4-36
L
Lamp
PMK
O
-
T
t
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
Step
2/3
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
TMON
TMON
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
(Decreased)
2) Program Example
(1) If P00020 is On, contact T0000 will be promptly On and Timer decreases.
(2) While P00020 is repeatedly On and Off it will keep decreasing.
(3) If Reset Signal P00023 is On, present value will be 0 and Output Off.
[Ladder Program]
[Time Chart]
4-37
Moves to left/right
Object
Signal stabilized
L.S
2
.
.
.
.
.
.
F
Address
P00020
M00020
T0000
Description
Limit switch used to detect position
Specific Time Output Relay
Vibration-proof Timer
(3) Program
4-38
TRTG
PMK
O
-
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
2/3
TR TG
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
t
t
Timer contact
point output
(Decreased)
2) Program Example
(1) If P00020 is On, contact T0096 is On at the same time, and if Timer decreases to 0, P00065 is Off.
(2) If P00020 input condition is allowed before 0 is reached, present value will be setting value and will
decrease again.
(3) If Reset Signal P00023 is On, present value will be 0 and Output Off.
[Ladder Program]
[Time chart]
P00020
t=5 sec
t
P00065
(Decreased)
4-39
(3) Program
Detected ( P00020 )
Signal
Timer
( T0005 )
Normal ( M00100 )
4-40
Designations
CTD
Down Counter
CTU
Up Counter
CTUD
Up-Down
Counter
CTR
Ring Counter
Operation characteristics
If counter decreases from setting value by 1 and reaches 0 whenever
pulse is input, Output is On
If counter increases setting value by 1 and exceeds setting value
whenever pulse is input, Output is On
If pulse is input in Up terminal, counter increases by 1. If present value
reaches setting value, Output is On. And if pulse is again input, present
value is On
If counter increases setting value by 1 and reaches setting value whenever
pulse is input, Output is On. And if pulse is again input, present value is On
(3) Up to 2,048 Counters can be used regardless of its type, and the setting value range available is
0~65,535. Repeated use of the same counter number is impossible. If the same counter number is used
repeatedly regardless of index used, it will be processed as repeated use, which makes Program
Download unavailable.
(4) Counter value setting available device (Operand available) is integers of P, M, K, U, D, R, etc. with index
functions available. However, at this moment available index range is Z0 ~ Z3.
(5) If Reset Instruction is used to reset Counter, be sure to input in the same format as used in Counter format
as shown below; If CTU C0010[Z000] P0010[Z003] is used,
Counter format used in reset coil shall be C0010[Z000], or program error will occur in SoftLogic-200 to
make Program Download unavailable.
4-41
Remark
1) Due to index function, counters with different characteristics if operated at a time will be executed individually to
produce abnormal operation. If index function is to be used, pay attention to this.
4-42
CTD
PMK
O
-
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2/3
Count Input
CTD
CTD
Reset Signal
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
1) Function
(1) It decreases by 1 from setting value whenever rising edge of pulse is input. And if 0 is reached, Output will
be On.
(2) If Reset Signal is On, Output will be Off and present value will be setting value.
[Time Chart]
2) Program Example
(1) If P00030 contact is On 5 times, P00060 Output will be On when present value is counted down to 0.
(2) If P00031 contact is On, Output will be Off and present value will be setting value.
[Ladder Program]
P00030
CTD
C0010
P00031
C0010
(R )
C0010
P00060
(
[Time Chart]
4-43
PMK
O
-
C
N
CTU
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2/3
Count Input
CTU
CTU
Reset Signal
R
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
1) Function
(1) It increases present value by 1 whenever Rising edge of the pulse is input. And if present value exceeds
setting value, Output will be On and maximum counter (65,535) will be counted.
(2) If Reset Signal is On, Output will be Off and present value will be 0.
[Time Chart]
2) Program Example
(1) If counted up to P00030 contact with present value identical to setting value, P00060 Output will be On.
(2) If P00031 contact is On, Output will be Off and present value will be initialized to 0.
[Ladder Program]
P00030
CTU
P00031
C0010
10
C0010
R )
(
C0010
P00060
(
[Time Chart]
P00031
P00030
Setting value
C0010
P00060
4-44
CTUD
C
U
D
N
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
Con
D.x R.x
st.
O O
O O
O
Step
O
O
O
2/3
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Count Input
CTUD
CTUD
Reset Signal
(R)
[Area Setting]
Operand
C
U
D
N
Description
Data Type
WORD
BIT
BIT
WORD
1) Function
(1) It increases present value by 1 whenever Rising edge of the pulse is input in U device. And if present value
exceeds setting value, Output will be On and maximum counter (65,535) will be counted.
(2) It decreases present value by 1 whenever Rising edge of the pulse is input in D device.
(3) If Reset Signal is On, present value will be 0.
(4) If U & D devices pulse are On at the same time, present value will not change.
(5) Up-Down Counter operates when Count Input Signal remained On status.
[Time Chart]
Reset Signal
Incr Pulse
Decr Pulse
Setting
Present
Counter contact
point output
4-45
C0000
P00030
P00031
20
C0000
R )
(
C0000
P00060
(
[Time Chart]
4-46
Digital output
Module P00006
Digital Input
Module P00003
PB1
PB2
M4
M3
M2
M1
0
1
2
3
.
.
.
.
.
P
r
o
g
r
a
m
CTUD
C0001
0
1
2
3
.
.
.
.
.
(3) Program
FOOO99
P00030
P00031
C0005
1
C0001
R )
(
FOOO99
CTUD
C0002
P00030
P00031
C0005
2
C0002
R )
(
FOOO99
CTUD
C0003
P00030
P00031
C0005
3
C0003
R )
(
FOOO99
CTUD
C0004
P00030
P00031
C0005
4
C0004
R )
(
FOOO99
CTUD
C0005
C0005
P00030
P00031
5
C0005
R )
(
C0001
P00060
C0002
P00061
(
(
C0003
)
)
P00062
(
C0004
P00063
(
4-47
CTR
PMK
O
-
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
2/3
Count Input
CTR
CTR
Reset Signal
(R)
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
1) Function
(1) It increases present value by 1 whenever riseing edge of the pulse is input. And if present value reaches
setting value and then input signal changes OffOn, present value will be On.
(2) If present value reaches setting value, Output will be On.
(3) If present value is lower than setting value or reset condition is On, Output will be Off.
[Time Chart]
Reset Signal
Count Pulse
Setting
Present
Counter contact
point output
2) Program Example
(1) If present value is the same as setting value due to count up by rising edge of the pulse of P00030 contact,
P00060 Output will be On.
(2) If P00030 contact is On at 11th time, P00060 Output will be Off and present value will be reset to 0.
[Ladder Program]
P00030
CTR
C0010
P00031
10
C0010
C0010
P00060
[Time Chart]
P00031
P00030
Setting
C0005
P00060
4-48
D.x R.x
Con
U
st.
PMK
Step
2~5
Flag
Error Zero Carry(
(F110) (F111) F112)
O
INSTRUCTION
MOV, DMOV
INSTRUCTION
MOVP,
DMOVP
means MOV/DMOV
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
Description
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
WORD/DWORD
1) MOV (Move)
It transfers specified S devices word data to D.
1word
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
h00F3
P00004
Remark
1) If Timer or Counter is used by MOV Instructions Operand, applicable timer or counters present value (1 word) can
be read or changed.
4-49
PMK
O
O
O
O
S
D
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O O O
O O
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
3~5
Instruction
MOV4, MOV8
Instruction
MOV4P, MOV8P
means MOV4/MOV8
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
Description
Data to transfer or bit position of device number data is saved in
Bit position of device number to save data transferred
Data Type
NIBBLE/BYTE
NIBBLE/BYTE
4-50
4) Program Example
Where 4-Bit Data from P00004 is transferred to D0.2 ~ D0.5 by MOV4P Instruction whenever Input Signal
P00020 is On.
P00020
MOV4P
P00004
D00000.2
Remark
1) Dxxx.x Rxxx.x Uxx.xx.x areas are not transferred to D+1 area but disregarded if MOV4, MOV8 Instruction results
exceed the area.
4-51
PMK
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
S
D
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
2~4
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
CMOV, DCMOV
Instruction
CMOVP, DCMOVP
means CMOV/DCMOV
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
WORD/DWORD
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
Before
1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
After
P0002
P0006
1 Word
S 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
( P0002 )
D 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0
CMOV execution
4-52
( P0006 )
GMOV(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
GMOV
GMOVP
Instruction
GMOVP
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Instruction
GMOV
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
Description
To be set, if Ns range exceeds specified area. Applicable instruction result is not
processed.
Device Number
F110
h0002
h0002
h0007
D+1
Group
transfortation .
N
.
.
D+N - 1
h007F
h005A
h0007
h007F
h005A
Word value
2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00020 is On, D00000, D00001, D00002 word data is saved in P00004, P00005, P00006.
S(Source)
D00000
D00001
h0001
D00002
h005F
h0004
GMOV
Execute
(Before)
D(Destination)
h0001
h0004
P00004
P00005
h005F
P00006
(After)
4-53
FMOV(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
4~6
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
FMOV
FMOV
FMOVP
Instruction
FMOVP
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Description
To be set, if Zs range exceeds specified area. Applicable instruction result is not
processed.
Device Number
F110
h0052
Word
value
h0052
M00000
h0052
M00001
h0052
M00002
h0052
(After)
M00003
N=4
2) Program Example
Whenever Input Signal P00020 is On, D00002 word data is saved in P0004, P0005, P0006.
FMOVP execution
D00002
h0098
h0098
P0004
Word
Value
h0098
P0005
h0098
P0006
4-54
BMOV(P)
PMK
O
O
-
O
-
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
-
O
O
S
D
Z
D.x R.x
-
Con
st.
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
BMOV
BMOV
BMOVP
Instruction
BMOVP
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Description
To be set, if Zs range exceeds specified area. Applicable instruction result is not
processed.
Device Number
F110
b8
b0
0 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0
S s start bit
D s start bit
h4906
4-55
GBMOV, GBMOVP
Area Available
Instruction
PMK
O
O
-
O
-
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
S
D
Z
N
GBMOV(P)
Con
D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
GBMOV
GBMOV
GBMOVP
Instruction
GBMOVP
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag
Description
Device Number
To be set, if Zs range exceeds specified area. Applicable instruction result is not
processed.
F110
To be set, if Ns range exceeds specified area.
Error
b8
b0
h130A
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
S s start bit
D s start bit
(2) If Z is h130A, it transmits Ss 10-bit data from the No.1 bit will be moved to Ds No.3 bit in regular order in
group.
(3) If area exceeded while executed, set Error Flag.
2) Program Example
(1) In case of D10000=h2408 and P1200=4 which is saved , If Intput contact P00000 is on, GBMOV instruction will be
executed.
(2) This example shows the group bit transmission. The transmitted data are sequentially saved in the 8-bit data area
of P1100 and bit 4 of P1100 receives bit 2 (b02) of P1000 first. 4 word data in the range of P1000 to P1003 are
moved to the range of P1100 to P1103 area in the same method.
P00000
GBMOV
4-56
P1000
P1100
D10000
P1200
PMK
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
RMOV, LMOV
RMOVP, LMOVP
Step
2~5
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
Instruction
means RMOV/LMOV
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
Description
Data to transfer or device number data is saved in
Device number to save data transferred
Data Type
REAL/LREAL
REAL/LREAL
4-57
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
2~18
Instruction
$MOV
$MOV
$MOVP
Instruction
$MOVP
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
STRING
STRING
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Description
Device Number
F110
b8 b7
b0
b15
First letter
2nd letter
4th letter
3rd letter
6th letter
5th letter
h00
nth letter
D
D+1
D+2
b8 b7
b0
b15
First letter
2nd letter
4th letter
3rd letter
6th letter
5th letter
h00
nth letter
If NULL is saved in S+ns lower byte, 0x00 will be saved in D+ns higher byte.
S
b15
b8
h42(B)
b0
b7
h41(A)
S+1
h44(D)
h43(C)
S+2
h46(F)
h00
S
S+1
S+2
b15
b8
h42(B)
h44(D)
h43(C)
h46(F)
h00
4-58
b0
b7
h41(A)
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
2~4
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
BCD, DBCD
Instruction
BCDP, DBCDP
means BCD/DBCD
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
WORD/DWORD
Description
As for BCD(P) when S value is other than 0~9999 (h270F).
As for DBCD(P) when S+1,Ss value is other than 0~99999999 (h5F5E0FF)
Device Number
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Data Size
16-bit
32-bit
BIN format
0~h270F
0~h05F5E0FF
BCD format
0~9999
0~99999999
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
S: h270F
Convert to BCD
2
D: BCD 9999
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
X10
X10
X10
4-59
X10
F110
3) Error
(1) If BIN Data after converted to BCD exceeds the range displayed, it sets Error Flag(F110).
4) Program Example
(1) Where h1111 data which is saved in D00001 after converted to BCD is output to P0005 if Input Signal
P00020 is On.
P00020
BCD D00001 P0005
4-60
(P00031)
Photoelectric S/W
(P00030)
Photoelectric S/W
Output
Photoelectric
S/W
2
3
6
7
Digital
Output
Unit
Counter
P
R
O
G
R
A
M
0
1
Conveyer Motor
Input
(3) Program
F00099
CTUD
C0000
P00030
P00031
P00032
30
C0000
R )
(
C0000
P0006F
(
F00099
BCD
BMOV
4-61
M0000
C0000
P0004
M0000
8
PMK
O
O
O
O
S
D
BCD4, BCD8
BCD4P, BCD8P
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O O O
O O
-
Step
3~5
Instruction
Instruction
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
means BCD4/BCD8
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
Description
Data to convert to BCD or bit position of device number data is saved in
Bit position of device number to save data converted
Data Type
NIBBLE/BYTE
NIBBLE/BYTE
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Description
As for BCD4 when Ss value is other than 0~9.
As for BCD8 when Ss value is other than 0~99.
Device Number
F110
1) BCD4
(1) It converts specified S devices 4-bit BIN data to (0~9) BCD4 and saves in specified D device area.
(2) Error Flag (F110) will be set if S value is other than (0~9).
2) BCD8
(1) It converts specified S devices 8-bit BIN data to (0~9) BCD8 and saves in specified D device area.
(2) Error Flag (F110) will be set if S value is other than (0~99).
3) Program Example
(1) If P00000 is On, 9s Nibble data will be BCD converted to h9 from P0200s No. 4 bit.
(2) If P00001 is On, 99s Byte data will be BCD converted to h99 from P0400s No. 8 bit.
4-62
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
2~4
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
BIN, DBIN
Instruction
BINP, DBINP
means BIN/DBIN
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
WORD/DWORD
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Description
As for BIN(P), Ss data is other than BCD format (0~9999)
As for DBIN(P), S+1,Ss data is other than BCD format (0~99999999)
Device Number
F110
1) BIN (Binary)
(1) It converts specified S devices BCD data (0~9999) to BIN data and it is saved in D.
Instruction
BCP(P)
DBCD(P)
Data Size
16-bit
32-bit
S: BCD 9999
BCD format
0~9999
0~99999999
BIN format
0~h270F
0~h05F5E0FF
1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
3
X 10
X 10
X 10
X 10
Convert to BIN
2
D: 0x270F
15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
4-63
2
1
2
0
2
0
D (Lower 4 places)
2
1
x10
x10
2
0
2
1
2
1
2
0
x10
x10
x10
2
1
x10
2
0
2
0
2
1
x10
x10
Covert to BIN
31
2
0
17 16
D : H05F5EOFF
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
1
S (Lower 16-bit)
3) Program Example
Where P0004 BCD data after converted to BIN data is saved in D00002 if Input Signal P00020 is On.
P0004
2
0
2
0
2
1
2
0
2
0
2
1
2
1
2
1
2
0
x10
2
0
2
0
2
0
2
1
x10
2
0
2
0
2
1
h2709
h0A95
x10
x10
Convert to BIN
D00002
4-64
PMK
O
O
O
O
S
D
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O O O
O O
-
Step
3~5
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
INSTRUCTION
BIN4, BIN8
INSTRUCTION
BIN4P, BIN8P
means BIN4/BIN8
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Description
Data Type
NIBBLE/BYTE
NIBBLE/BYTE
Description
As for BIN4(P), Ss device value is other than BCD format (0~9)
As for BIN8(P), Ss device value is other than BCD format (0~99)
Device Number
F110
1) BIN4
(1) It converts specified S devices 4-bit BCD data (0~9) to BIN4 and saves in D.
(2) Error Flag (F110) will be set if Ss value is other than BCD format (0~9).
2) BIN8
(1) It converts specified S devices 8-bit BCD data (0~99) to BIN8 and saves in D.
(2) Error Flag (F110) will be set if S value is other than BCD format (0~99)
3) Program Example
(1) If Input signal P00000 is On, BCD data is converted and saved from P0200s No.4 bit.
If Input signal P00001 is On, BCD data is converted and saved from P0400s No.8 bit.
P00000
BIN4
h9
P02004
BIN8
h99
P04008
P00001
4-65
GBCD(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
4~6
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
GBCD
GBCDP
GBCD
GBCDP
Instruction
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Description
If one value among N data is other than 0~9999(h270F)
To be Set if Ns range exceeds specified area
Device Number
F110
2) Program Example
(1) If Input signal P00000 is On, 5 word data from P1000~P1004 is Group BCD converted respectively and saved
in P1100~P1104 area.
Remark
1) In Basic Parameter with Continue running when an arithmetic error occurs, if 1 value among N data is other
than 0~9999, other data will not be converted to BCD nor operated.
4-66
GBIN, GBINP
Area Available
Instruction
S
D
N
GBIN(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
4~6
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
GBINP
[Area Setting]
Operand
GBIN
GBINP
Instruction
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
WORD
[Flag Set]
Flag
Description
If one value among N data is other than BCD 0~9999.
To be set if Ns range exceeds specified area
Error
Instruction
GBIN
Con
D.x R.x
st.
O
O
Device Number
F110
P1000
P1100
Remark
1) In Basic Parameter with Continue running when an arithmetic error occurs, if any value among specified Ss
n datas is other than BCD format, all the n datas will not be operated.
4-67
PMK
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
S
D
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
I2R, I2L
Instruction
I2RP, I2LP
means I2R/I2L
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
Description
Data Type
INT
REAL/LREAL
b15
b0
h04D2
b31
h449A
D+1
(1234)
b15
b0
h4000
D
b15
b0
h04D2
(1234)
b63
b48
h4093
D+3
b32
h4800
D+2
b16
h0000
D+1
b0
h0000
D
3) Program Example
(1) If Input signal P0000 is On, It converts Integer 1234 to Real and save in 2 word data area from D1200 to
D1201.
P00000
12R
4-68
1234
D1200
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
D2R, D2L
P S
Instruction
D2RP, D2LP
means D2R/D2L
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
Area Number where Double Integer Data is saved, or Double Integer Data
DINT
REAL/LREAL
S+1,S
b31
h00BC
b15
b0
h614E
b31
h4B3C
D+1
(12345678)
b15
b0
h614E
D
b31
h00BC
b15
b0
h614E
b63
b48
h4167
D+3
(12345678)
b16
b32
h8C29
D+2
hC000
D+1
b0
h0000
D
3) Program Example
(1) In case of Double Integer data 812121 is saved in 2 Word data area from P1000 to P1001, If Input signal
P00000 is On, Double Integer data 812121 is converted to Real data in 2 Word area from P1100 to P1101.
P00000
D2R
4-69
P1000
P1100
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
R2I, R2D
Instruction
R2IP, R2DP
means R2I/R2D
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
REAL
INT/DINT
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Description
When R2I Instruction used and S specified Single Real Number is out of
-32,768~32,767 range.
When R2D Instruction used and S specified Single Real Number is out of
-2,147,483,648 ~2,147,483,647 range.
Device Number
F110
b31
S+1, S
h4640
b0
b15
D
hE6B6
(12345.678)
b0
h303A
(12346)
(2) If S+1,S specified Real Number value exceeds -32,768~32,767 range, operation error occurs.
At this moment, the result of 32,767 will be saved if input value is bigger than 32,767, and -32,768 will be
saved if input value is smaller than -32,768.
(3) Value of below decimals is will be omitted after rounding off the nearest integer.
2) R2D ( Real to Double Integer )
(1) R2D converts S+1,S specified 32-bit Integer data to Double Real Number(32-bit) and saves in D+1,D.
b15
b31
S+1, S
h47F1
b0
b31
D+1, D
h2065
b15
h0001
b0
hE241
(123457)
(123456.78)
(2) If S+1,S specified Real Numbers value exceeds -2,147,483,648~2,147,483,647 range, operation error
occurs. At this moment, the result of 2,147,483,647 will be saved if Real value is bigger than 2,147,483,647,
and -2,147,483,648 will be saved if Real value is smaller than -2,147,483,648.
(3) Value of below decimals is will be omitted after rounding off the nearest integer.
4-70
4) Program Example
(1) If Input signal P00000 is On, Real data 45688.8123 is converted to Interger data of 45689 in 2 Word from
P1100 to P1101.
P00000
R2D
4-71
45688.8123
P1100
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
2~4
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instuction
L2I, L2D
Instruction
L2IP, L2DP
means L2I/L2D
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
Area Number where Double Real Data is saved, or Double Real Data
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
LREAL
INT/DINT
Description
Device Number
When L2I Instruction used and S specified Real Number is out of -32,768~32,767
range
F110
When L2D Instruction used and S specified Real Number is out of -2,147,483,648
~2,147,483,647 range
b48
H4093
D+3
b32
H4A45
b16
H84FD
D+2
D+1
(1234.5678901234)
b15
b0
H0FF6
b0
H04D2
(1234)
(2) If S+3,S+2,S+1,S specified Double Real Numbers value exceeds -32,768 ~ 32,767 range, operation error
occurs. At this moment, the result of 32,767 will be saved if input value is bigger than 32,767, and -32,768
will be saved if input value is smaller than -32,768.
(3) Value of below decimals is will be omitted after rounding off the nearest integer.
2) L2D (Double Real to Double Integer )
(1) D2L(P) converts S+3,S+2,S+1,S specified Double Real Data to Double Integer data (32-bit) to save in
D+1,D.
b63
b48
H4167
S+3
b32
H8C29
b16
HDCD6
S+2
S+1
(12345678.901234)
b0
HE8B0
b15
b31
D+1, D
H00BC
b0
H614E
(12345678)
(2) If S+3,S+2,S+1,S specified Real Numbers value exceeds -2,147,483,648 ~ 2,147,483,647 range,
operation error occurs. At this moment, the result of 2,147,483,647 will be saved if Real value is bigger than
2,147,483,647, and -2,147,483,648 will be saved if Real value is smaller than -2,147,483,648.
(3) Value of below decimals is will be omitted after rounding off the nearest integer.
4-72
3) Program Example
(1) In case of Double Real data from D1000~D1003=13456.6 is saved, If Input signal P0000 is On, Integer data of
13457 is converted and it is saved in P1100.
P00000
L2I
4-73
D1000
P1100
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S1
S2
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O O O
O O O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
CMP, DCMP
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
CMPP, DCMPP
means CMP/DCMP
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
WORD/DWORD
S2
WORD/DWORD
1) CMP (Compare )
(1) It compares S1 with S2 in size to set applicable flag of 6 special relays as its result.
(Unsigned Operation)
Flag
SET basis
S1> S2
S1< S2
S1= S2
F120
<
0
1
0
F121
0
1
1
F122
=
0
0
1
F123
>
1
0
0
F124
1
0
1
F125
1
1
0
F120
<
0
F121
F122
=
1
F123
>
0
F124
F125
(3) In the program, 6 special relays display the result of Compare Instruction previously used.
(4) 6 special relays can be used unlimitedly.
2) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=100 and P1100=10, If Input signal is On, F123 is set because P1000 is bigger than P1100
(P1000>P1100).
P00000
CMP
4-74
P1000
P1100
S1
S2
PMK
O
O
O
O
Con
U
st.
O O O
O O O
D.x R.x
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
2~4
Instruction
CMP4, CMP8
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
CMP4P, CMP8P
means CMP4/CMP8
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
NIBBLE/BYTE
S2
NIBBLE/BYTE
4-75
P01004
P02008
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
st.
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
TCMP, DTCMP
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
TCMPP, DTCMPP
means TCMP/DTCMP
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
WORD/DWORD
S2
WORD/DWORD
WORD/DWORD
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Description
The value of D area + 15 (Word) is exceeded range of applicable device.
Device Number
F110
2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00020 is On, It is compare Data h0057 saved in D0000 to 16-word data from D0002. And
compared result 3 is saved in P0006.
4-76
GX(P)
GDX(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1
Con
D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
4~6
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Description
Data Type
WORD
S2
WORD
WORD
WORD
N
[Flag Set]
Flag
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
32000
S2
2) Program
S1
S1+1
S1+2
32000
4321
32000
S1+(n-2)
S1+(n-1)
1234
5678
h0003
Example
Operation Result
D1000
D1001
D1002
1234
5678
5000
D1006
D1007
7777
4321
D1100
D1101
D1102
1234
5678
5000
D1106
D1107
7777
4321
h00FF
D1200
8
If Input signal P0000 is On, It compare 8-word data and compared result h00FF is saved in D1200.
P00000
GEQ
4-77
D1000
D1100
D1200
S1
S2
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O O
S1
LOAD(D) X
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~3
S2
means LOAD(D) X
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
INT/DINT
S2
INT/DINT
Condition
S1 = S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 < S2
S1 > S2
Operation result
On
On
On
On
On
On
(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows;
h8000( -32768) ~ hFFFF( -1 ) < 0 ~ h7FFF( 32767 ).
2) LOADD X ( D=, D>, D<, D>=, D<=, D< >)
(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, present operation result will be On. And the other
operation results will be Off.
X Condition
=
<=
>=
<>
<
>
Condition
S1 = S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 < S2
S1 > S2
Operation result
On
On
On
On
On
On
(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows;
h80000000(-2147483648) ~ hFFFFFFFF( -1 ) < 0 ~ h7FFFFFFF(2147483647).
3) Program Example
(1) In case of D1000=10 and D2000=10, Compare Input Signal is On and then h1500 is saved in P0160 area.
D1000
MOV
D2000
4-78
h1500
P0160
AND X, ANDD X
Area Available
Instruction
AND X
ANDD X
S1
S2
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~3
Instruction
S1
AND(D) X
S2
means AND(D) X
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
INT/DINT
S2
INT/DINT
Condition
S1 = S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 < S2
S1 > S2
Operation result
On
On
On
On
On
On
(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows;
h8000( -32768) ~ hFFFF( -1 ) < 0 ~ h7FFF( 32767 ).
2) ANDD X ( D=, D>, D<, D>=, D<=, D< >)
(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its
result and present BR value will be AND operated to lead to a new operation result.
X Condition
=
<=
>=
<>
<
>
Condition
S1 = S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 < S2
S1 > S2
Operation result
On
On
On
On
On
On
(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows;
h80000000(-2147483648) ~ hFFFFFFFF( -1 ) < 0 ~ h7FFFFFFF(2147483647).
3) Program Example
(1) In case of D1000=10 and D2000=10, If Input Signal P00000 is On, AND logic operation will be operated with the
compared result of On status of Compare Input Signal and then 1500 is saved in P0160 area.
P00000
=
D1000
D2000
MOV
4-79
1500
P1600
S1
S2
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~3
Instruction
OR(D) X
S1
S2
means OR(D) X
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
INT/DINT
S2
INT/DINT
Condition
S1 = S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 < S2
S1 > S2
Operation result
On
On
On
On
On
On
(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows;
h8000( -32768) ~ hFFFF( -1 ) < 0 ~ h7FFF( 32767 ).
2) ORD X (D=, D>, D<, D>=, D<=, D< >)
(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its
result and present operation result will be OR operated to lead to a new operation result.
X Condition
=
<=
>=
<>
<
>
Condition
S1 = S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 < S2
S1 > S2
Operation result
On
On
On
On
On
On
(2) Comparison of S1 and S2 is executed by Signed Operation. Thus, the result will be as follows;
h80000000(-2147483648) ~ hFFFFFFFF( -1 ) < 0 ~ h7FFFFFFF(2147483647).
3) Program Example
(1)If Input Signal P00000 becomes On or = Compare Input Signal becomes On because D1000=10 and D2000=10,
1500 is saved in P1600.
P00000
MOV
=
D1000
1500
P1600
D2000
4-80
PMKL F
S1
S2
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O O
LOADR X
LOADL X
S1
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~5
S2
means LOADR X / LOADL X
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
Real Number Data to compare or Device Number to specify Real Number Data
REAL/LREAL
S2
Real Number Data to compare or Device Number to specify Real Number Data
REAL/LREAL
Condition
S1 = S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 < S2
S1 > S2
Operation result
On
On
On
On
On
On
(2) S1 and S2 as floating decimal real number will be compared for operation based on X Condition.
(3) Be sure that X Condition R= used. The value of floating decimal real number depends on accuracy.
2) LOADL X ( L=, L<, L>, L<=, L>=, L< >)
(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, present operation result will be On.
X Condition
=
<=
>=
<>
<
>
Condition
S1 = S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 < S2
S1 > S2
Operation result
On
On
On
On
On
On
S1 and S2 as long floating decimal real number will be compared for operation based on X Condition.
Be sure that X Condition R= used. The value of floating decimal real number depends on accuracy.
3) Program Example
(1) In case of D1000=1.5 and D2000=1.5, Real = Compare Input Signal is On and then 1234 is saved in P1600.
R =
D1000
MOV
D2000
4-81
1234
P1600
S1
S2
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O O
ANDR X
ANDL X
S1
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
2~5
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
S2
means ANDR X / ANDL X
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
Real Number Data to compare or Device Number to specify Real Number Data
REAL/LREAL
S2
Real Number Data to compare or Device Number to specify Real Number Data
REAL/LREAL
Condition
S1 = S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 < S2
S1 > S2
Operation result
On
On
On
On
On
On
(2) S1 and S2 as floating decimal real number will be compared for operation based on X Condition.
2) ANDL X ( L=, L>, L<, L>=, L<=, L< >)
(1) It compares S1 with S2. And if identical to X Condition, result will be On, if not identical, it will be Off, and its
result and present BR value will be AND operated to lead to a new operation result.
X Condition
=
<=
>=
<>
<
>
Condition
S1 = S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 < S2
S1 > S2
Operation result
On
On
On
On
On
On
(2) S1 and S2 as long floating decimal real number will be compared for operation based on X Condition.
3) Program Example
(1) If Real = Compare Input Signal is On since Input signal P00000 becomes On and D1000=1.5 and D2000=1.5,
the result of AND operation becomes On and then 1234 is saved in P1600.
P00000
R =
P1000
P2000
MOV
4-82
1234
P1600
ORR X, ORL X
Area Available
Instruction
ORR X
ORL X
S1
S2
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~5
Instruction
ORR X
ORL X
S1
S2
Means ORR X / ORL X
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
Real Number Data to compare or Device Number to specify Real Number Data
REAL/LREAL
S2
Real Number Data to compare or Device Number to specify Real Number Data
REAL/LREAL
Condition
S1 = S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 < S2
S1 > S2
Operation result
On
On
On
On
On
On
(2) S1 and S2 as floating decimal real number will be compared for operation based on X Condition.
Condition
S1 = S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 < S2
S1 > S2
Operation result
On
On
On
On
On
On
(2) S1 and S2 as long floating decimal real number will be compared for operation based on X Condition.
3) Program Example
(1) If Real = Compare Input Signal is On since Input signal P00000 becomes On and D1000=1.21 and D2000=1.21,
1234 is saved in P1600.
P00000
MOV
R =
D1000
D2000
4-83
1234
P1600
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S1
S2
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O O
S1
LOAD$ X
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~17
S2
means LOAD$ X
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
STRING
S2
STRING
S1
Condition
S1 = S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 < S2
S1 > S2
Compared results
On
On
On
Off
Off
Off
b15
b8 b7
b0
42H (B)
41H (A)
S1+1
44H (D)
43H (C)
S1+2
00H
45H (E)
S2
=
"ABCDE"
b15
b8 b7
b0
42H (B)
41H (A)
S2+1
44H (D)
43H (C)
S2+2
00H
45H (E)
"ABCDE"
(2) Character code is compared with Hexadecimal number. Accordint to the compared result, the status will be
changed On or Off.
(However, front place of String and length is preferred potentially)
2) Program Example
(1) In case of the String which is respectively saved D1000=English and D2000=English, String Compare Input
Signal becomes On, 3456 is saved in P1600.
$ =
D1000
MOV
D2000
4-84
3456
P1600
AND$ X
Area Available
Instruction
S1
S2
AND$ X
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~17
Instruction
S1
AND$ X
S2
means AND$ X
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
STRING
S2
STRING
S1
Condition
S1 = S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 < S2
S1 > S2
Compared results
On
On
On
On
On
On
b15
b8 b7
b0
41H (A)
42H (B)
S1+1
44H (D)
43H (C)
S1+2
00H
45H (E)
S2
=
b15
b8 b7
b0
42H (B)
41H (A)
S2+1
44H (D)
43H (C)
S2+2
00H
45H (E)
"ABCDE"
"ABCDE"
(2) And its result and present BR will be AND operated to lead to a new operation result.
(3) Toward the larger character code, the inequality sign will be on. (However, front place of String and length is
preferred potentially)
(4) And its result and present BR will be AND operated to lead to a new operation result.
2) Program Example
(1) In case of P00000 becomes On and saved String is respectively D1000=English and D2000=English, String
Compare Input Signal becomes On and AND operation calculates and then 1567 is saved in P1600.
P00000
$ =
D1000
D2000
MOV
4-85
1567
P1600
S1
S2
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~17
Instruction
OR$ X
S1
S2
means OR$ X
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1
S2
Description
String to compare or Device Number String is saved in
String to compare or Device Number String is saved in
Data Type
STRING
STRING
S1
Condition
S1 = S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 S2
S1 < S2
S1 > S2
Compared results
On
On
On
On
On
On
b15
b8 b7
b0
41H (A)
42H (B)
S1+1
44H (D)
43H (C)
S1+2
00H
45H (E)
S2
=
b15
b8 b7
b0
42H (B)
41H (A)
S2+1
44H (D)
43H (C)
S2+2
00H
45H (E)
"ABCDE"
"ABCDE"
(2) Toward the larger character code, the inequality sign will be on (However, front place of String and length is
preferred potentially) And its result and present BR will be OR operated to lead to a new operation result.
2) Program Example
(1) Input Signal P00000 becomes On or saved String becomes respectively D1000=English2 and D2000=English2
String Compare Input Signal becomes On and then 1234 is saved in P1700.
P00000
MOV
$ =
D1000
D2000
4-86
1234
P1700
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S1
LOADG X
LOADDG X S2
N
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
LOADG X
LOADGX
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S1
S2
Step
4/5
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1
S2
N
[Flag Set]
Flag
Description
Data Type
INT/DINT
INT/DINT
WORD
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
S1
1234 (BIN)
S2
5321 (BIN)
S1+1
5678 (BIN)
S2+1
3399 (BIN)
S1+2
5000 (BIN)
S2+2
5678 (BIN)
>
Off(0)
S1
1234 (BIN)
S2
5321 (BIN)
S1+1
5678 (BIN)
S2+1
3399 (BIN)
S1+2
5000 (BIN)
S2+2
5678 (BIN)
>
Off(0)
4-87
D1000
1234
D1100
1234
D1001
5678
D1101
5678
D1002
5000
D1102
5000
8
D1006
D1007
7777
D1106
7777
4321
D1107
4321
G =
D1000
D1100
On(1)
MOV
4-88
1300
P1400
S1
S2
N
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4/5
Instruction
ANDG X
ANDGX
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1
S2
Description
Data Type
S1
INT
S2
INT
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
P1000
P2000
MOV
4-89
1500
P1600
ORG X, ORDG X
Area Available
Instruction
ORG X
ORDG X
S1
S2
N
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S2
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4/5
Instruction
ORG X
ORGX
S1
means ORG X
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
S1
S2
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Data Type
INT
INT
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
MOV
G=
P1000 P2000
P2010
4-90
P1500
P1600
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
-- O
O
O
S1
LO A D (D )3 X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S2
S3
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4/5
means LOAD(D)3 X
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
INT
S2
INT
S3
INT
3 =
D1000
D1200
MOV
D1300
4-91
1234
P1500
AND3 X, ANDD3 X
Area Available
Instruction
AND3 X
ANDD3 X
S1
S2
S3
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4/5
S1
S2
Instruction
AND(D)3 X
means AND(D)3 X
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
INT
S2
INT
S3
INT
D1000
D1200
D1300
MOV
4-92
1234
P1500
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S1
S2
S3
Con
D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
4/5
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
OR3(D) X
S1
S2
means OR3(D) X
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
S1
Data to compare or Device Number to specify Data to compare
S2
Data to compare or Device Number to specify Data to compare
S3
Data to compare or Device Number to specify Data to compare
Data Type
INT
INT
INT
D1000
D1100
D1200
4-93
1234
P1600
PMK
--
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2/3
Instruction
S
INC, DINC
Instruction
P
INCP, DINCP
means INC/DINC
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
Description
Data Type
INT
1) INC( Increment )
(1) It saves the result of D plus 1 again in D.
(2) It performs Signed Operation.
3) Flag Process
(1) As for INC/DINC Instruction, no flag will be processed by operation result.
4) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00001 Off status is changed to On status,5678 adds 1 and then 5679 which is added result
saved in P1100. When P00001 is repeated Off and On status, the value saved in P1100 is increased one. (5678
-> 5679 -> 5680 -> 5681, ...)
P1100
b15
P1100
b0
5678
b15
+1
b0
5679
4-94
Instruction
INC4(P)
INC8(P)
PMK
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2/3
Instruction
S
INC4, INC8
Instruction
P
INC4P, INC8P
means INC4/INC8
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
Description
Data Type
NIBBLE/BYTE
3) Flag Process
(1) As for INC/DINC Instruction, no flag will be processed by operation result. Carry Flag (F112) is not generated
when Maximum value is increased 1.
4) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed On from Off status, the result 2 which is the saved value 1 from No. 4 Bit of
P0100 plus 1 is saved in No.4 Bit of P0100 by Nibble unit. When P00001 is repeated On from Off status the value
which is saved in P0100 is increased 1 (h0015 -> h0025 -> h0035 -> h0045).
P0100
b15
P0100
b0
h0015
b15
+1
b0
h0025
P00000
INC4P
4-95
P01004
PMK
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2/3
Instruction
S
DEC, DDEC
Instruction
P
DECP, DDECP
means DEC/DDEC
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
Description
Data Type
INT
b0
b15
b0
b15
DEC
-1
1 2 3 4
1 2 3 3
b0
b31
S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 7
3) Flag Process
(1) As for INC/DINC Instruction, no flag will be processed by operation result. Carry Flag (F112) is not generated
when Minimum value is decreased 1.
4) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, the result 1233 of 1234 minus 1 is saved in P1000.
When P00000 is repeated On from Off status the value which is saved in P1000 is decreased 1 (1234->1233>1232->1231->1230..).
P0100
b15
P0100
b0
1234
b15
-1
b0
1233
P00000
DECP
4-96
P1000
PMK
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2/3
Instruction
S
DEC4, DEC8
Instruction
P
DEC4P, DEC8P
means DEC4/DEC8
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
Description
Data Type
NIBBLE/BYTE
3) Flag Process
(1) As for INC/DINC Instruction, no flag will be processed by operation result. Carry Flag (F112) is not generated
when Minimum value is decreased 1.
4) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed On from Off status, the result 6 of the value 7 which is saved from No. 4
Bit in P0100 minus 1 is saved from No.4 Bit in P0100. When P00000 is repeated On from Off status the
value which is saved in P1000 is decreased 1. (h0075 -> h0065 -> h0055 -> h0045 -> h0035).
P0100
b15
P0100
b0
h0075
b15
-1
b0
h0065
P00000
DEC4P
4-97
P01004
PMK
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2/3
Instruction
S
INCU, DINUC
Instruction
P
INCUP, DINCUP
means INCU/DINCU
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
[Flag Set]
Flag
Description
Data Type
WORD
Device Number
Zero
Description
To be set if INCU(P) is executed when S is 32767(h7FFF).
To be set if DINCU(P) is executed when S is 2147483647(h7FFFFFFF).
To be set if (D)INCU(P) is executed when S is 1(FFFF or FFFFFFFF).
Carry
F112
Error
F110
F111
1) INCU (Increment)
(1) It saves the result of S plus 1 again in S.
(2) It performs Unsigned Operation.
(3) If INCU(P) is executed when Ss value is 65,535 (h7FFF), 0(h0000) will be output and Zero Flag and Carry Flag
will be set.
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=100, When Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, the value saved in P1000 is
increased 1.
P00000
INCUP
P1000
Remark
(1) INC(P), DINC(P), DEC(P), DDEC(P) Instructions used in MKS series to perform Unsigned Operation have been
changed in MasterLogic-200 as shown below. If Increase/Decrease Instructions have been used in previous
program version of MasterLogic-200, see below to modify the data.
DEC(P) DECU(P)
INC(P) INCU(P)
DINC(P) DINCU(P)
DDEC(P) DDECU(P)
4-98
PMK
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2/3
Instruction
S
DECU, DDECU
Instruction
P
DECPU, DDECUP
means DECU/DDECU
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
[Flag Set]
Flag
Zero
Carry
Description
Data Type
WORD
Description
To be set if (D)DEC(P) is executed when S is 1.
To be set when S is 0 ~ hFFFF.
Device Number
F111
F112
1) DECU( Decrement )
(1) It saves the result of S minus 1 and it save in S again.
(2) S is processed as Unsigned operation.
(3) If DECU(P) is executed when S is 0(h0000), 65,535(hFFFF) will be output and Carry Flag will be set.
(4) If (D)DECU(P) is executed when S is 1, 0 will be output and Zero Flag will be set.
3) Program Example
(1) If P1000=100, When Input Signal P00000 is repeated changing to On from Off status, the saved value in P1000 is
decreased 1.
P00000
DECUP
4-99
P1000
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D
n
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
ROL, DROL
Instruction
P
ROLP, DROLP
means ROL/DROL
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
n
[Flag Set]
Flag
Carry
Description
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F112
b15
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
Rotation to the left
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=h1234, when Input signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 4 bits to the left
bit by bit and then h2341 will be saved in P1000.
P00000
ROLP
4-100
P1000
PMK
O
O
O
O
D
n
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
O
O O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
ROL4, ROL8
Instruction
P
ROL4P, ROL8P
means ROL4/ROL8
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
n
[Flag Set]
Flag
Carry
Description
Data Type
NIBBLE/BYTE
WORD
Description
Device Number
F112
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P01004~P01007=h3, when Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 2 bits to
the left bit by bit, and then hc will be saved in P01004~P01007.
P00000
ROL4P
4-101
P01004
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D
n
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
ROR, DROR
Instruction
P
RORP, DRORP
means ROR/DROR
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
n
[Flag Set]
Flag
Carry
Description
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F112
b15
b0
Carry Flag
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=h1234, Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 4 bits to the right bit by
bit and then h4123 is saved in P1000.
P00000
RORP
4-102
P1000
PMK
O
O
O
O
D
n
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
O
O O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
ROR4, ROR8
Instruction
P
ROR4P, ROR8P
means ROR4/ROR8
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
n
[Flag Set]
Flag
Carry
Description
Data Type
NIBBLE/BYTE
WORD
Description
Device Number
F112
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P01004=h00C3, Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 2 Bits to the right
bit by bit and then h0033 is saved in P01004.
P00000
ROR4P
4-103
P01004
D
n
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
RCL, DRCL
Instruction
P
RCLP, DRCLP
means RCL/DRCL
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
n
[Flag Set]
Flag
Description
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
WORD
Description
Carry
Device Number
F112
b15
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
Rotation to the right
(F112)
S+1
C arry Flag
b14
b5 b4
b3
b2
b1 b0
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=hF000, when Input Signal is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 4 bits to the left bit by bit
and then hE00 is saved in P1000 and Carry Flag will be set.
P00000
RCLP
4-104
P1000
PMK
O
O
O
O
D
n
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
O
O O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
RCL4, RCL8
Instruction
P
RCL4P, RCL8P
means RCL4/RCL8
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
n
[Flag Set]
Flag
Carry
Description
Data Type
NIBBLE/BYTE
WORD
Description
Device Number
F112
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P0100c~P0100F=hF, Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 4 bits to the left.
hE000 will be saved in P0100 and Carry Flag will be set.
P00000
RCL4P
4-105
P0100C
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D
n
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
O O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
RCR, DRCR
Instruction
P
RCRP, DRCRP
means RCR/DRCR
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
n
[Flag Set]
Flag
Carry
Description
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F112
b15
Carry Flag
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
S+1
b31 b30 b29 b28 b27
b14
b5 b4
Carry Flag
b3
b2
(F112)
b1 b0
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=hF, When Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 4 bits to the right bit
by bit and then h0000 will be saved in P1000 and Carry Flag will be set.
P00000
RCRP
4-106
P1000
PMK
O
O
O
O
D
n
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
O
O O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
RCR4, RCR8
Instruction
P
RCR4P, RCR8P
means RCR4/RCR8
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
n
[Flag Set]
Flag
Carry
Description
Data Type
NIBBLE/BYTE
WORD
Description
Device Number
F112
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P01000~P01003=hF, When Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 4 bits to
the right and then h000E will be saved in P01000 and Carry Flat will be set.
P00000
RCR4P
4-107
P01000
BSFT(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
O O
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
3/4
Instruction
BSFT
St
Ed
St
Ed
Instruction
P
BSFTP
means BSFT
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
St
BIT
Ed
BIT
2) Program Example
(1) In case of P0070=h8000, when Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It shifts to the right from
Start bit P0070F to End bit P00704 bit by bit because P0070F is larger than P00704 (P0070F > P00704).
P00000
BSFTP
4-108
P0070F
P00704
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D
n
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
BSFl, DBSFL
Instruction
P
BSFLP, DBSFLP
means BSFL/DBSFL
[Area Setting]
Operand
D
Description
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
n
[Flag Set]
Flag
Carry
Carry Flag will be On/Off based on the bit cut away last.
WORD
Description
Device Number
F112
b0
0
Before
CY
When N=2
D 1
After
D+1
b31
b15
b0
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 Before
When N=2
CY
D
1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 After
Filled with 0
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=h000F, When P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It rotates 4 bit to the left bit by bit
and h00F0 is saved in P1000.
P00000
BSFL
4-109
P1000
D
n
PMK
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
O
O O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
3~5
Instruction
BSFL4, BSFL8
Instruction
P
BSFL4P, BSFL8P
means BSFL4/BSFL8
[Area Setting]
Operand
D
n
[Flag Set]
Flag
Carry
Description
Data Type
NIBBLE/BYTE
Number of bits among 4/8 bits to shift to the left from specified D bit position.
WORD
Description
Device Number
Carry Flag will be On/Off based on the bit cut away last.
F112
D: Start bit
4 Bit
b15
D 0
b0
1
Before
CY
D 0
When N=2
After
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P0100=h00F0, It shifts 4 bits from No. 4 bit to the left and h03C0 will be saved in P0100.
P00000
BSFL4
4-110
P01004
D
n
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
BSFR, DBSFR
Instruction
P
BSFRP, DBSFRP
means BSFR/DBSFR
[Area Setting]
Operand
D
n
[Flag Set]
Flag
Carry
Description
Device Number to shift bits
Number of times to shift word data S to the right bit by bit.
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
Carry Flag will be Set/Reset based on the bit cut away last.
F112
3) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=h001F, If Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, It rotates bits to the right for
4 times and then h0001 will be saved in D01000 and Carry Flag will be set.
P00000
P
BSFR
4-111
D01000
D
n
PMK
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O O
O
O O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
3/4
Instruction
BSFR4(P)
Instruction
BSFR8(P)
means BSFL
[Area Setting]
Operand
D
n
[Flag Set]
Flag
Carry
Description
Data Type
NIBBLE/BYTE
Number of bits among 4/8 bits to shift to the right from specified D bit position.
WORD
Description
Device Number
Carry Flag will be Set/Reset based on the bit cut away last.
F112
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P0100=h00F0, If Input Signal is changed to On from Off status, It rotates bits to the right from No.4 bit
by bit for 4 times and then h000F will be saved in P0100.
P00000
BSFR4
4-112
P01004
WSFT, WSFTP
Area Available
Instruction
WSFT(P)
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
2~4
Instruction
WSFT
St
Ed
St
Ed
Instruction
WSFTP
means WSFT
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
St
WORD
Ed
WORD
b15
b0
1234
Start word
b15
b0
0
Start word
2345
3456
If St <
4567
5678
End word
Shift word
by word
1234
2345
Ed
3456
4567
End word
2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed to On from Off status, 1234 saved in D01000 will be downward by 1 word and
saved in D01001.
b15
D01000
b15
b0
1234
2345
1234
3456
2345
4567
D01004
b0
D01000
5678
Shift by
1 word
3456
D01004
4567
P00000
WSFTP
4-113
D01000
D01004
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D1
D2
N
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
WSFL, WSFR
D1
D2
D1
D2
Instruction
P
WSFLP, WSFRP
means WSFL/WSFR
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
D1
WORD
D2
WORD
WORD
3) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00020 is changed to On from Off status, 9-word data from P0000 to P0008 will be shifted to the
right by 2-word and 0 will be saved in P0007,P0008.
P00020
WSFR
4-114
P0000
P0008
SR
Area Available
Instruction
Db
I
D
N
SR
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
Con
U
st.
O O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
SR
[Area Setting]
Operand
Db
I
D
N
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
SR
Db
Description
Data Type
BIT
WORD
Description
Device Number
Error Flag will be set if N value exceeds maximum Db area when SR instruction is
F110
executed.
1) SR
(1) It shifts N data from Shift Start Bit Db when Inpunt Signal which is execution condition of SR instruction is changed
to On from Off status.
(2) It shifts bits to the right if input direction bit is On, and to the left if off.
(3) The bits empty after data shifted will be filled with input data bits value.
D direction, shifted for S2
2) Program Example
(1) In case of M00012=0 and M00013=0, when 1 initial Clock of Input Signal F00093 is changed to On from Off
status, it shifts 8-bit data to the left from D0000s No. 0 bit and empty bit of input data is changed to 0.
(2) If Input bit data M00012=1, empty bit is charged 1
(3) If shift direction bit M00013=1, direction of bit data is changed to the right and Bit Shift is executed with 1
second cycle.
F00093
SR
4-115
D00000.0
M00012
M00013
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
XCHG(P) D1
DXCHG(P) D2
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
(D)XCHG
D1
D2
D1
D2
Instruction
(D)XCHGP
means (D)XCHG
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
D1
WORD/DWORD
D2
WORD/DWORD
1) XCHG ( Exchange )
(1) It exchanges word data of specified D1 and D2.
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=h1234 and P1100=5678, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, 5678 is
saved in P10000 and then h1234 is saved in P1100.
P00000
XCHG
4-116
P1000
P1100
GXCHG, GXCHGP
Area Available
Instruction
D1
GXCHG(P) D2
N
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
GXCHG
D1
D2
D1
D2
Instruction
P
GXCHGP
means GXCHG
[Area Setting]
Operand
D1
D2
N
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) GXCHG
(1) It exchanges N word data starting from D1 and D2.
h0001
D1
D10
h0100
h0002
h0101
h0003
h0102
h0004
h0103
h0005
h0104
h0006
h0105
(2) It exchanges N data while increasing based on the value of D1 and D2. If D1 and D2 are overlapped,
unintentional result will be caused.
2) Program Example
(1) Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, it exchanges 3-word data of P0010~P0012 and
P0020~P0022.
P10
h0001
P20
h0100
h0002
h0101
h0003
h0102
h0100
P20
h0101
h0002
h0102
h0003
P00000
GXCHG
4-117
h0001
P0010
P0020
PMK
Con
D.x R.x
U
st.
O
Step
2
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
SWAP
D
Instruction
SWAPP
means SWAP
[Area Setting]
Operand
D
Description
Data Type
WORD
1) SWAP
(1) It exchanges byte upper and lower in a word.
2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On, 1-word data in D00100s upper byte and lower byte is
exchanged and then saved in P00100 again.
Upper byte
Lower byte
D100 0
D100 0
P00000
SWAP
4-118
D00100
GSWAP, GSWAPP
Area Available
Instruction
PMK
O
O
O
O
D
N
GSWAP(P)
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
GSWAP
Instruction
GSWAPP
means GSWAP
[Area Setting]
Operand
D
N
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1byte
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1
Byte exchanged
2) Program Example
(1) If Input signal P00000 is changed from Off too On, 3-word data of P1000~P1002s upper byte and lower byte is
exchanged.
P00000
GSWAP
4-119
P1000
ADD(P)
DADD(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
4~6
Instruction
(D)ADD
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
(D)ADDP
means ADD/DADD
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
Data to be added to S2
S2
Data to be added to S1
INT/DINT
INT/DINT
INT/DINT
b15
b0
5678 (BIN)
b15
D
b0
b15
1234 (BIN)
b0
6912 (BIN)
D
b16 b15
567890 (BIN)
S+1
b31
b0
S
b16 b15
D+1
b31
b0
123456 (BIN)
D
b16 b15
b0
691346 (BIN)
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=1234 , P1100=1111, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, the added result
of 2345 is saved In P1200.
P00000
ADD
4-120
P1000
P1100
P1200
Instruction
S1
S2
D
SUB(P)
DSUB(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
4~6
Instruction
(D)SUB
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
(D)SUBP
means SUB/DSUB
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
S1
Data Type
INT/DINT
S2
INT/DINT
INT/DINT
b15
b0
5678 (BIN)
b15
D
b0
b15
1234 (BIN)
b0
4444 (BIN)
D
b16 b15
567890 (BIN)
S+1
b31
b0
S
b16 b15
D+1
b0
b31
123456 (BIN)
D
b16 b15
b0
444434 (BIN)
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=200 and P1100=100, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, the result of
subtracted 100 will be saved in P1200.
P00000
SUB
4-121
P1000
P1100
P1200
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S1
S2
D
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
MUL,DMUL
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
MULP, DMULP
means MUL/DMUL
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1
Description
Data Type
Data to be multiplied by S2
INT/DINT
S2
Data to be multiplied by S1
INT/DINT
DINT/LINT
S2
b0
1234
b15
D + 1
b0
b31
b16 b15
2893730
2345
b0
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=100 and P1100=20, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, the result of
multiplied 2000 is saved in P1200~P1201.
P00000
MUL
P1000
P1100
P1200
Remark
Among MKS Instructions, the names of instructions of MULS, DIV, etc. have been changed in MasterLogic-200 as
shown below.
However, their functions are the same as before.
DMULS(P) DMUL(P)
MULS(P) MUL(P)
DIV(P) DIVU(P)
DDIV(P) DDIVU(P)
4-122
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S1
S2
D
DIV(P)
DDIV(P)
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
(D)DIVU
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
(D)DIVUP
means DIV/DDIV
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
S1
Data Type
Data to be divided by S2
S2
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
INT/DINT
Data to be divided by S1
INT/DINT
INT/DINT
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
D quotient
S2
b0
b15
9876
b15
b0
D+1 remainder
b0
b15
1234
b0
4
S1
b16 b15
567890 (BIN)
S2+1
b0
..
b31
D+1
S2
b16 b15
b0
123456 (BIN)
b31
D
b16 b15
D+3
b0
b31
4 (BIN)
D+2
b16 b15
b0
74066 (BIN)
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=5577 and P1100=5, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On, the quotient 1111 is
saved in P1200 and then the remainder 2 is saved in P1201.
P00000
DIV
4-123
P1000
P1100
P1200
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S1
ADDU(P)
DADDU(P) S2
D
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
(D)ADDU
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
(D)ADDUP
means ADDU/DADDU
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
Data to be added to S2
WORD/DWORD
S2
Data to be added to S1
WORD/DWORD
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
WORD/DWORD
Zero
F111
Carry
F112
Description
Device Number
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=1234 and P1100=5, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, the Unsigned
addition result 1239 is saved in P1200.
P00000
ADDU
4-124
P1000
P1100
P1200
Instruction
S1
SUBU(P)
DSUBU(P) S2
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
(D)SUBU
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
(D)SUBUP
means SUBU/DSUBU
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
WORD/DWORD
S2
WORD/DWORD
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
WORD/DWORD
Zero
F111
Carry
F112
Description
Device Number
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=1234 and P1100=5, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, the result of
subtraction 1229 is saved in P1200.
P00000
(D)SUBU
4-125
P1000
P1100
P1200
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
(D)MULU
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
(D)MULUP
means MULU/DMULU
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1
S2
Description
Data Type
Data to be multiplied by S2
WORD/DWORD
Data to be multiplied by S1
WORD/DWORD
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
DWORD/LWORD
Zero
Description
Device Number
F111
3) Program Example
(1) in case of P1000=1234 and P1100=2, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, the result of
Unsigned addition 2468 is saved in P1200.
P00000
MULU
4-126
P1000
P1100
P1200
DIVU(P)
DDIVU(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
(D)DIVU
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
(D)DIVUP
means DIVU/DDIVU
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1
S2
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
Description
Data Type
Data to be divided by S2
WORD/DWORD
Data to be divided by S1
WORD/DWORD
WORD/DWORD
Description
Device Number
Error
F110
Zero
F111
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=5559 and P1100=5, Input Signal is changed from Off to On status, the quotient of Unsigned
division 1111 is saved in P1200 and the remainder 4 is saved in P1201.
P00000
DIVU
4-127
P1000
P1100
P1200
S1
S2
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~8
Instruction
RADD, LADD
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
RADDP, LADDP
means RADD/LADD
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
Data to be added to S2
REAL/LREAL
S2
Data to be added to S1
REAL/LREAL
REAL/LREAL
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Description
Device Number
To be set if FPU operation error flag of F0057E, F0057C, F0057B or F0057A is set.
F110
-126
| Operand | < 2
128
If the result of operands value exceeds the range, operation error will occur. However, specific
value may be assigned thereto to keep continuous operation.
P00001
RADD
M0000
M0004
M0008
-1022
| Operand | < 2
1024
If the result of operands value exceeds the range, operation error will occur. However, specific value
may be assigned thereto to keep continuous operation.
P00001
LADD
4-128
M0000
M0004
M0008
S1
S2
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~8
Instruction
RSUB, LSUB
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
RSUBP, LSUBP
means RSUB/LSUB
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
REAL/LREAL
S2
REAL/LREAL
REAL/LREAL
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Description
Device Number
To be set if FPU operation error flag of F0057E, F0057C, F0057B or F0057A is set.
F110
-126
128
| Operand | < 2
If the result of operands value exceeds the range, operation error will occur. However, specific
value may be assigned thereto to keep continuous operation.
P00001
RSUB
M0000
M0004
M0008
-1022
| Operand | < 2
1024
If the result of operands value exceeds the range, operation error will occur. However, specific value
may be assigned thereto to keep continuous operation.
P00001
LSUB
4-129
M0000
M0004
M0008
RMUL(P)
LMOV(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~8
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
RMUL
Instruction
P
RMULP
means RMUL/LMUL
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
Data to be multiplied by S2
REAL/LREAL
S2
Data to be multiplied by S1
REAL/LREAL
REAL/LREAL
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Description
Device Number
To be set if FPU operation error flag of F0057E, F0057C, F0057B or F0057A is set.
F110
-126
| Operand | < 2
128
If the result of operands value exceeds the range, operation error will occur. However, specific
value may be assigned thereto to keep continuous operation.
P00001
RMUL
M0000
M0004
M0008
-1022
| Operand | < 2
1024
If the result of operands value exceeds the range, operation error will occur. However, specific value
may be assigned thereto to keep continuous operation
P00000
LMUL
4-130
P1000
P1100
P1200
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S1
S2
D
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~8
Instruction
RDIV, LDIV
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
RDIVP, LDIVP
means RDIV/LDIV
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
Data to be divided by S2
REAL/LREAL
S2
Data to be divided by S1
REAL/LREAL
REAL/LREAL
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Description
Device Number
To be set if FPU operation error flag of F0057E, F0057C, F0057B or F0057A is set.
F110
-126
| Operand | < 2
128
If the result of operands value exceeds the range, operation error will occur. However, specific value
may be assigned thereto to keep continuous operation.
P00001
RDIV
M0000
M0004
M0008
-1022
| Operand | < 2
1024
If the result of operands value exceeds the range, operation error will occur. However, specific value
may be assigned thereto to keep continuous operation.
P00001
LDIV
4-131
M0000
M0004
M0008
$ADD(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
D.x R.x
st.
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
4~18
Instruction
$ADD
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
$ADDP
means $ADD
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
STRING
S2
STRING
STRING
b8 b7
h4D(M)
h4B(K)
h00
.
.
S1+15
h00
b0
H32(2)
h4C(L)
h00
b15
S2
.
.
h00
2MLK
b8 b7
h4C(L)
h53(S)
h00
.
.
S2+15
h00
b0
h50(P)
h43(C)
h00
b15
D
.
.
h00
"PLC"
D+15
b8 b7
h4D(M)
h4B(K)
h4C(L)
h00
b0
H32(2)
h4C(L)
h50(P)
h43(C)
h00
h00
h00
h00
2MLK PLC
(2) Even if the length of S1 String plus S2 String exceeds the size of String data, error will not occur. In this case, the
value to be saved in D will be as big as the size of String data starting from S1 value.
Remark
(1) String data will be processed in 16-word data regardless of the String length. Thus, String-related instruction if
used shall designate a device which is allowed to use 16-word space.
4-132
GADD(P)
GSUB(P)
S1
S2
D
N
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
4~7
Instruction
GADD, GSUB
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
GADDP, GSUBP
means GADD/GSUB
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1
Description
Data Type
INT
S2
INT
INT
N
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
b0
S1
b15
1234
S1+1
.
.
.
S1+(N-1)
S2
5555
+
1000
S2+1
.
.
.
S2+(N-1)
b0
b0
b15
1111
2222
=
-1000
2345
D+1
.
.
.
D+(N-1)
7777
b0
b15
1234
5555
b15
S2
b0
100
1000
(3) If specified devices area is exceeded due to N value, error will occur.
4-133
D+1
.
.
.
D+(N-1)
b0
1334
5655
1100
b0
S1
b15
1234
S1+1
.
.
.
S1+(N-1)
S2
5555
1000
S2+1
.
.
.
S2+(N-1)
b0
b0
b15
1111
2222
=
-1000
123
D+1
.
.
.
D+(N-1)
3333
2000
b0
b0
b15
1234
D
b15
5555
S2
b0
100
1000
(3) If specified devices area is exceeded due to N value, error will occur.
4-134
D+1
.
.
.
D+(N-1)
1134
5455
900
4.21
4.21.1
Instruction
PMK F
S1
ADDB(P)
DADDU(P) S2
D
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
D.x R.x
st.
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
ADDB, DADDB
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
ADDBP, DADDBP
means ADDB
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
S2
WORD/DWORD
WORD/DWORD
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
WORD/DWORD
Description
Device Number
Error
F110
Zero
F111
Carry
F112
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=100 and P1100=200, If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On, BCD data 300 is
saved in P1200.
P00000
ADDB
4-135
P1000
P1100
P1200
S1
S2
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
S1
S2
S3
S1
S2
S3
Instruction
SUBB,DSUBB
Instruction
P
SUBBP, DSUBBP
means SUBB/DSUBB
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1
S2
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Zero
Carry
Description
BCD data to be subtracted from S2
BCD data to be subtracted from S1
Address to save operation result in
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
WORD/DWORD
WORD/DWORD
Description
If the value of S1 and S2 is not of BCD format.
To be set if operation result is Set.
To be set if operation result is Set.
Device Number
F110
F111
F112
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=200 and P1100=100, Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On, BCD data 100 is saved
in P1200.
P00000
SUBB
4-136
P1000
P1100
P1200
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
4~6
Instruction
MULB, DMULB
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
MULBP, DMULBP
means MULB/DMULB
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1
S2
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Zero
Description
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
WORD/DWORD
DWORD/LWORD
Device Number
F110
F111
S1
+1
S1
9
D +3
9
S2
+1
S2
9
D +1
D +2
9
D
9
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=100 and P1100=10, If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, BCD data 1000
is saved in P1200 and P1201, 2-word area.
P00000
MULB
4-137
P1000
P1100
P1200
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S1
S2
D
DIVB(P)
DDIVB(P)
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
DIVB, DDIVB
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
DIVBP, DDIVBP
means DIVB/DDIVB
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1
S2
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Zero
Description
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
WORD/DWORD
WORD/DWORD
Description
If the value of S1 and S2 is not of BCD format, if the value of S2 is 0
To be set if operation result is Zero.
Device Number
F110
F111
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=105 and P1100=10, If Input Signal is chaged from Off to On, P1000 is divided by P1100. In
BCD division result, the quotient 10 is saved in P1200 and the remainder 5 is saved in P1201.
P00000
DIVB
4-138
P1000
P1100
P1200
4.22
4.22.1
Instruction
S1
WAND(P)
S2
DWAND(P)
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
(D)WAND
S1
S2
P S1
S2
Instruction
(D)WANDP
means WAND/DWAND
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
BIN 16/32
S2
BIN 16/32
D
[Flag Set]
Address to save
Flag
Zero
BIN 32
Description
Device Number
F111
S1
b8 b7
b0
1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
WAND
b15
S2
b15
b8 b7
b0
1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
b8 b7
b0
1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
4-139
S1+1
b31
S1
S1
b0
b16 b15
1 1 0 0
1 0 1 1 1 0
0 1 1 0
DWAND
S2
S2+1
b31
S2
b31
1 0 0 0
1 1 0 1
0 0 1 1 0 1
D+1
b0
b16 b15
1 0 1 1
D
b0
b16 b15
0 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 0
Logic AND
Logic OR
Exclusive Logic
OR (XOR)
Exclusive
Negative
Logic OR
(XNR)
Processing Details
Example
Operation Formula
Y=A B
Y=A+B
Y=A B+A B
Y=(A+B)(A+B)
4) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=h1111, P1100=h3333, If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On, the result WAND
executed h3333 is saved in P1200.
P00000
WAND
4-140
P1000
P1100
P1200
Instruction
WOR(P)
DWOR(P)
S1
S2
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
S1
S2
P S1
S2
Instruction
(D)WOR
Instruction
(D)WORP
means WOR/DWOR
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1
S2
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
Zero
Description
Data Type
BIN 16/32
BIN 16/32
BIN 16/32
Description
Device Number
F111
1) WOR( Word OR )
(1) It saves the result of word data (16-bit) S1 and S2 operated in Logic OR for each bit in D.
b15
S1
b8 b7
b0
1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
WOR
b15
S2
b0
1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
b15
b8 b7
b8 b7
b0
1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
4-141
S1
S1
b0
b16 b15
1 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 0 1
1 0 0 1
DWOR
S2
S2+1
b31
S2
1 1 0 0
b31
1 1 0 1
1 0 1 1
1 0 0 1 0 1
D+1
b0
b16 b15
D
b0
b16 b15
1 1 1 1 0 1
1 0 1 1
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=h1111 and P1100=h2222 , If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On, the result WOR
operation h3333 is saved in P1200.
P00000
WOR
4-142
P1000
P1100
P1200
Instruction
S1
WXOR(P)
S2
DWXOR(P)
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
S1
S2
P S1
S2
Instruction
(D)WXOR
Instruction
(D)WXORP
means WXOR/DWXOR
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
S2
WORD/DWORD
WORD/DWORD
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
Zero
WORD/DWORD
Description
Device Number
F111
S1
b8 b7
b0
0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
WXOR
b15
S2
b15
b8 b7
b0
1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
b8 b7
b0
1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
(2) Exclusive OR: If one bit is 0 and the other bit is 1, the corresponding result bit is set to 1. Otherwise, the
corresponding result bit is set to 0.
4-143
S1+1
b31
S1
S1
b0
b16 b15
0 1 1 1
0 0 1 1 0 1
0 0 0 1
DWXOR
S2
S2+1
b31
S2
b31
1 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 0 0 1 0 1
D+1
b0
b16 b15
1 0 0 1
D
b0
b16 b15
1 0 1 0 0 0
1 0 1 1
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=h1111 and P1100=h2222, Input Signal is changed from Off to On, the WOR operation result of
h3333 is saved in P1200.
P00000
WXOR
4-144
P1000
P1100
P1200
Instruction
S1
WXNR(P)
S2
DWXNR(P)
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
S1
S2
P S1
S2
Instruction
(D)WXNR
Instruction
(D)WXNRP
means WXNR
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
S2
BIN 16/32
BIN 16/32
D
[Flag Set]
Flag
Zero
BIN 16/32
Description
Device Number
F111
S1
b8 b7
b0
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
WXNR
b15
S2
b15
b8 b7
b0
0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
b8 b7
b0
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
(2) Exclusive NOR: If S1 and S2 bit is different from each ather, the operated result is 0. If S1 and S2 bit is
same, the operated result is 1. The operated result is saved in applicable bit.
2) DWXNR( Double Word Exclusive NOR )
(1) It saves the result of Double word data S1+1,S1 and S2+1,S2 operated in Exclusive NOR for each bit in Double
word area of D+1, D.
4-145
S1
S1+1
b31
S1
b0
b16 b15
1 0 1 0
0 0 1 1 0
1 1 1 0
DWXNR
S2
S2+1
b31
S2
0 0 1 0
b31
0 1 1 1
0 0 1 0
1 0 1 1 1 0
D+1
b0
b16 b15
b0
b16 b15
0 1 1 1 0 0
0 0 1 1
3) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=h1111 and P1100=h2222, If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On, the Exclusive
NOR (WXNR) result hCCCC is saved in P1200.
P00000
WXNR
4-146
P1000
P1100
P1200
GWAND, GWANDP
Area Available
Instruction
S1
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O
O O
S2
GWAND(P)
D
N
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
GWAND
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
GWANDP
means GWAND
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
BIN 16
S2
BIN 16
BIN 16
BIN 16
N
[Flag Set]
Flag
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
b8 b7
b15
b0
b8 b7
b0
S1
1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
S2
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
S1+1
1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
S2+1
1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
S1+2
0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
S2+2
0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1
AND
S1+(N-2) 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
S2+(N-2) 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1
S1+(N-1) 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
S2+(N-1) 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
b15
b8 b7
b0
1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
D+1
1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
D+2
0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
D+(N-2)
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
D+(N-1)
1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
4-147
b8 b7
b0
S1
1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
S1+1
1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
S1+2
0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
b15
AND
S2
b8 b7
b0
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
S1+(N-2) 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0
S1+(N-1) 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
b15
b8 b7
b0
1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
D+1
1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
D+2
0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1
D+(N-2)
1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
D+(N-1)
1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 1
2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to ON status, It saves the result of GWAND operation 5-word data from
P1000~P1004 with 5-word data from P1100~P1104 in 5-word of P1200~1204 respectively.
P00000
GWAND
4-148
P1000
P1100
P1200
GWOR, GWORP
Area Available
Instruction
S1
S2
D
N
GWOR(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
GWOR
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
GWORP
means GWOR
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
WORD
S2
WORD
WORD
N
[Flag Set]
Flag
WORD
Error
Description
Device Number
F110
b8 b7
b15
b0
b8 b7
b0
S1
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
S2
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1
S1+1
1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
S2+1
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
S1+2
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
S2+2
0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
OR
S1+(N-2) 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
S2+(N-2) 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1
S1+(N-1) 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1
S2+(N-1) 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0
b15
b8 b7
b0
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
D+1
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1
D+2
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
D+(N-2)
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1
D+(N-1)
1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1
4-149
b8 b7
b0
S1
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
S1+1
1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
S1+2
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
b15
OR
S2
b8 b7
b0
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1
S1+(N-2) 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
S1+(N-1) 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1
b15
b8 b7
b0
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
D+1
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1
D+2
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1
D+(N-2)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
D+(N-1)
1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 1
2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On, It saves the result of GWOR operation 5-word data from
P1000~P1004 with 5-word data from P1100~P1104 in 5-word data of P1200~P1204 respectively.
P00000
GWOR
4-150
P1000
P1100
P1200
GWXOR, GWXORP
Area Available
Instruction
S1
S2
GWXOR(P)
D
N
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
GWXOR
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
GWXORP
means GWXOR
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
S1
Data Type
WORD
S2
WORD
WORD
WORD
N
[Flag Set]
Flag
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
b8 b7
b15
b0
b8 b7
b0
S1
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
S2
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
S1+1
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
S2+1
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
S1+2
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
S2+2
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
XOR
S1+(N-2) 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
S2+(N-2) 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1
S1+(N-1) 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
S2+(N-1) 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
b15
b8 b7
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
D+1
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
D+2
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0
D+(N-2)
0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
D+(N-1)
1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 1
4-151
b8 b7
b0
S1
0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
S1+1
1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
S1+2
0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
b15
XOR
S2
b8 b7
b0
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1
S1+(N-2) 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
S1+(N-1) 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1
b15
b8 b7
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0
D+1
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
D+2
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1
D+(N-2)
1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
D+(N-1)
1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, It saves the result of GWXOR operation 5-word data from
P1000~P1004 with 5-word data from P1100~P1104 in 5-word data of P1200~P1204 respectively.
P00000
GWXOR
4-152
P1000
P1100
P1200
GWXNR, GWXNRP
Area Available
Instruction
S1
S2
GWXNR(P)
D
N
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
GWXNR
S1
S2
S1
S2
Instruction
P
GWXNRP
means GWXNR
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
WORD
S2
WORD
WORD
WORD
N
[Flag Set]
Flag
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
b8 b7
b15
b0
b8 b7
b0
S1
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1
S2
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
S1+1
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
S2+1
1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
S1+2
1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
S2+2
0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 1
XNR
S1+(N-2) 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1
S2+(N-2) 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
S1+(N-1) 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
S2+(N-1) 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 1
b15
b8 b7
b0
0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
D+1
0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
D+2
0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
D+(N-2)
1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
D+(N-1)
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
4-153
b8 b7
b0
S1
1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1
S1+1
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 1
S1+2
1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
b15
XNR
S2
b8 b7
b0
0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
S1+(N-2) 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 1
S1+(N-1) 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
b15
b8 b7
b0
0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
D+1
1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1
D+2
0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
D+(N-2)
0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1
D+(N-1)
0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0
2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal is changed from Off to On status, It saves the result of GWXNOR operation 5-word data from
P1000~P1004 with 5-word data from P1100~P1104 in 5-word data of P1200~P1204 respectively.
P00000
GWXNR
4-154
P1000
P1100
P1200
4.23
Display Instruction
4.23.1
SEG, SEGP
Area Available
Instruction
SEG(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
O
-
S
D
Z
Con
Z D.x R.x
st.
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Instruction
SEG
Instruction
P
SEGP
means SEG
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
BIN 32
BIN 32
Format to display
BIN 16
Z
[Flag Set]
Flag
Error
Description
Device Number
F110
1) SEG( 7 Segments )
(1) It saves 7 segments of N digits decoded from S by Zs specified format in D.
Zs format (Hexadecimal)
b0
0
n = 1
n = 2
b15
b0
4-155
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Data
displayed
0000
0001
0010
Hexadecimal
Bit
0
1
2
Formation of
7 Segments
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
b0
b5
b6
b1
b2
b4
b3
3) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, It displays for 4 digits that it is decoded from No.0 bit of
P1000 to No.0 of P1100 to 4 digits by 7 segments decoding format h0004 is saved in 2-word area of
P1100~P1101.
P00000
SEG
4-156
P1000
P1100
h0004
4.24
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
(D)BSUM
Instruction
(D)BSUMP
means BSUM
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Zero
Description
Address of word data to count the number of 1s
Address to save the counting result
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
WORD
Description
To be set if operation result is Zero
Device Number
F111
4-157
4-158
D01000
D01100
D
N
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
U
st
O
O O
D.x R.x
O
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
BRST
Instruction
BRSTP
means BRST
[Area Setting]
Operand
D
Description
Data Type
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
BIT
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
2) Program Example
(1) If Input signal P00000 becomes On, It is Reset to 0 from 10-bit in P00103.
P00000
BRST
4-159
P00103
10
ENCO(P)
S
D
N
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
ENCO
Instruction
ENCOP
means ENCO
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
WORD
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Zero
Description
If effective number of bits N is other than 0 ~ 8
If effective number of bits starting from S exceeds device area
If effective 2N data is Zero.
Device Number
F110
F111
1) ENCO (Encode)
(1) It saves the result of the highest position of 1 made Hexadecimal among effective 2N data saved in S Device, in
specified device D.
(2) S1 if input with constant will be encoded in the input variable area although Ns value exceeds 4 (Searched
number of bits is 16).
(3) If N is 0, D will not be changed in details.
(4) It saves the result of the highest contact point position of 1 made Hexadecimal in 2N area, in D.
P0002
b15
b8 b7
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b15
b8 b7
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
P0001
25 bits
5 bits
b15
b8 b7
b0
P0012
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
2) Program Example
(1) In case of P1000=h4321 and P1200=h0004, If Input Signal is changed from Off to On status, h000E is saved in
P1100.
P00000
ENCOP
4-160
P1000
P1100
P1200
DECO(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
DECO
P S
Instruction
DECOP
means DECO
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
WORD
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
If effective number of bits N is other than 0 ~ 8
N
Number of effective 2 which is started D is exceeds the device area
Device Number
F110
1) DECO (Decode)
(1) It decodes the lower N bits among saved data in specified S, and then the result saved in specified D device for 2N
bits. (8 bit is decoded to 256 bit)
(2) 1~8 is available for N.
(3) If N is 0, D will not be changed in details.
P0001
b15
b8 b7
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
N (5) bits
24th bit set
25 bits
P0013 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
b15
b8 b7
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 P0012
b15
b8 b7
b0
2) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=h1234 and D01200=h0005, If Input Signal is changed from Off to On status, It
saves D01101=h0010 and D01100=h0000.
P00000
DECOP
4-161
D01000
D01100
D01200
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S
D
N
DIS(P)
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
DIS
Instruction
DISP
means DIS
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
S
D
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Data Type
WORD
WORD
WORD
Description
To be set if N exceeds 4.
If number of Ns range from D exceeds specified device area
Device Number
F110
1) DIS (Distribute)
(1) It saves the result of specified S devices data divided into N nibbles (4-bit) in specified device D starting, in
regular order for the number of N.
(2) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.
(3) Starting from device D, D+1, , the lower 1 nibble will be filled with divided data, and the upper bits left with 0s.
(4) If N exceeds 4, Error Flag will be set.
b15
b8 b7
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
D+1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
D+2
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0
D+3
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
9
D
E
8
8
S
1 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1
b15
b8 b7
b0
2) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=h1234 and D01200=h0003, If Input Signal P00000 is changed from Off to On status, It saves
D01100=h0004, D01101=h0003 and D01102=h0002.
P00000
DISP
4-162
D01000
D01100
D01200
UNI(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
UNI
Instruction
UNIP
means UNI
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
WORD
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Device Number
If number of Ns range starting from S exceeds acceptable range of specified device, it
will be set.
F110
To be set if N exceeds 4.
1) UNI (Unite)
(1) It saves the result of the united lower 4 bits in the N words starting from S, in word data D. At this moment the
upper 12 bit ignored.
(2) Each 4-bit data will be united from the lower in regular order and saved in word data D.
(3) Except the lower N 4-bit data in word data D, all will be 0.
(4) If N exceeds 4, Error Flag will be set.
b15
b8 b7
b0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1
S+1
0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
S+2
0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1
S+3
0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
1 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1
b15
b8 b7
b0
2) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=h0004, D01001=h003 ,D01002=h0002 and D1200=h0003, In Input Signal P00000 is changed
from Off to On status, It saves D01100=h0432.
P00000
UNIP
4-163
D01000
D01100
D01200
WTOB(P)
S
D
N
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
WTOB
Instruction
WTOBP
means WTOB
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
WORD
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
1) WTOB
(1) It saves N bytes resulted from each word data divided into 2 bytes starting from S, in starting D. At this
time, the upper byte will be filled with 0s, and the lower byte with byte value divided.
b15
S
S+1
b8 b7
b0
Upper byte
Upper byte
Lower byte
Lower byte
Upper byte
Lower byte
b15
D
D+1
D+2
D+3
D+(n-2)
D+(n-1)
h00
h00
h00
h00
b8 b7
b0
Lower byte data
Lower byte data
Lower byte data
Lower byte data
h00
h00
N
byte
2) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=h1234, D01001=h5678,D01200=h0003, If Input Signal P00000 is changed
from Off to On, It saves D01100=h0034, D01101=h0012 and D01102=h0078.
P00000
WTOBP
4-164
D01000
D01100
D01200
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S
D
N
BTOW(P)
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
BTOW
Instruction
BTOWP
means BTOW
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
WORD
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
1) BTOW
(1) It saves the result of the lower N byte data united with word data starting from S, in starting D. At this time,
if N is an odd number, the upper of device saved last will be filled with 0s.
(2) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.
b15
S
S+1
S+2
n bytes
S+3
b8 b7
st
1 byte data
nd
2 byte data
rd
3 byte data
th
4 byte data
b0
D
D+1
b15
nd
2 byte data
th
4 byte data
b8 b7
st
1 byte data
rd
3 byte data
b0
S+n
2) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=h0012, D01001=h0034 and D01200=h0003, In Input Signal is changed from Off to On status,
It saves D01100=h3412 and D01101=h0045.
P00000
BTOWP
4-165
D01000
D01100
D01200
IORF(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
IORF
IORF
S1
S3
S3
IORFP
S1
S2
S3
Instruction
IORFP
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
S2
DWORD
WORD
S3
DWORD
2) Program Example
(1) 01 means No.1 slot of No.0 base. If I/O Fixed allocation is specified, applicable module address is P0004~P0007
in 64 points Input module.
(2) In case of D01000=h00FF and D01100=HFF00, if Input signal is changed from Off to On,
P0004 is not refresh the input data since D01100s the lower 16 bits is h00.
P0005 is refresh the input data since D01100s the upper 16 bits is hFF.
P0006 is refresh the input data since D01000s the lower 16 bits is hFF.
P0007 is not refresh the input data since D01000s the upper 16 bits is h00.
P00000
IORFP
4-166
01
D01000
D01100
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S1
S2
D
N
SCH(P)
DSCH(P)
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
S1
S2
P S1
S2
(D)SCH
Instruction
(D)SCHP
means (D)SCH
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
WORD/DWORD
S2
WORD/DWORD
WORD
WORD
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Description
Device Number
Error
F110
Zero
F111
Data to search
S1
123
S2
10
S2+1
500
S2+2
123
Identical data
Searching range(N)
-123
S2+(N-2)
20
S2+(N-1)
123
123
(5) As its result, specified D, D+1 device will be 0 if no identical data is found.
4-167
Searching progress
D
Position identical
D+1
Number identical
Data to search
S1+1,S
123
5678901
S2+1,S2
10
S2+3,S2+2
500
S2+5,S2+4
123
Data identical
Searching range
(2n)
-123
S2+(N-3),S2+(N-4)
20
S2+(N-1),S2+(N-2)
123
123
Searching
progress
Position identical
D+1
Number identical
3) Program Example
(1) It searches in number of D01300 word data in D01100 for the value identical to word data D01000 in regular order.
(2) It saves the firest vlaues address in D, the total of the value identical to D01000 in D01201.
(3) In case of D01000=h1234, D01100=h1111, D01101=h2222, D01102=h1234, D01103=h1234, D01104=h3333, If
D01300=h0006, D01200=h0003 is for the position D01102 first united data. And D01202=h0002 is saved for 2
united number.
P00000
SCHP
4-168
D01000
D01100
D01200
D01300
MAX(P)
DMAX(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
(D)MAX
P S
Instruction
(D)MAXP
means (D)MAX
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
INT/DINT
INT/DINT
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
WORD
Description
Device Number
Error
F110
Zero
F111
1) MAX (Maximum)
(1) It searches from word data S up to N range for the maximum value to save in D.
(2) Comparison in size will be performed by signed operation.
(3) If operation result is Zero, Zero Flag will be set.
(4) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.
Head No. of object to search
S
123
S+1
10
S+2
500
S+3
123
S + (n-4)
-123
S + (n-3)
20
S + (n-2)
123
123
S + (n-1)
Maximum value
Searching range
(n )
4-169
500
-12345
S+2
25894
S+4
256
588479
S+6
S + (2n-8)
26594823
S + (2n-6)
145
S + (2n-4)
-258
S + (2n-2)
Maximum value
Searching range
(n )
26594823
-365412
3) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=1111, D01001=3333, D01002=2222, If Input Signal P00000 is changed from
Off to On status, It saves D01100=3333.
P00000
MAXP
4-170
D01000
D01100
D01200
MIN(P)
DMIN(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
(D)MIN
P S
Instruction
(D)MINP
means (D)MIN
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
INT/DINT
INT/DINT
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Zero
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
F111
1) MIN (Minimum)
(1) It searches from word data S up to N range for the minimum value to save in D.
(2) Comparison in size will be performed by signed operation.
(3) If operation result is Zero, Zero Flag will be set.
(4) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.
Head No. of object to search
S
123
S+1
10
S+2
S+3
500
S + (n-4)
-123
123
S + (n-3)
20
S + (n-2)
123
123
S + (n-1)
Minimum value
Searching range
(n )
4-171
-123
-12345
S+2
25894
S+4
256
S+6
588479
S + (2n-8)
Searching range
(n )
-365412
26594823
S + (2n-6)
145
S + (2n-4)
-258
-365412
S + (2n-2)
Minimum value
3) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=1111, D01001=3333, D01002=2222, D01200=h0003, If Input Signal P00000 is changed from
Off to On status, It saves D01100=1111.
P00000
MINP
4-172
D01000
D01100
D01200
SUM(P)
DSUM(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
Step
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
(D)SUM
Instruction
(D)SUMP
means (D)SUM
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
INT/DINT
INT/DINT
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
WORD
Description
Device Number
Error
F110
Zero
F111
Carry
F112
123
S+1
10
S+2
500
S+3
123
S + (n-4)
-123
S + (n-3)
20
S + (n-2)
123
123
S + (n-1)
Sum
n
4-173
899
-12345
S+2
25894
S+4
256
S+6
Sum
588479
S + (2n-8)
26594823
S + (2n-6)
145
S + (2n-4)
-258
S + (2n-2)
-365412
26831591
3) Program Example
(1) In case of Dp1000=h1111, D01001=h3333, D01002=h2222, D01200=h0003, If Input Signal P00000 is changed
from Off to On status, it saves D01100=h6666.
P00000
SUMP
4-174
D01000
D01100
D01200
AVE(P)
DAVE(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
(D)AVE
P S
Instruction
(D)AVEP
means AVE
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
INT/DINT
INT/DINT
INT/DINT
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Description
Device Number
Error
F110
Zero
F111
123
S+1
10
S+2
500
S+3
123
S + (n-4)
-123
S + (n-3)
20
S + (n-2)
123
123
S + (n-1)
Average
n
4-175
112
-12345
S+2
25894
S+4
256
S+6
588479
S + (2n-8)
S + (2n-6)
S + (2n-4)
S + (2n-2)
Average
D
3353948
26594823
145
-258
-365412
3) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=1111, D01001=3333, D01002=2222, D01200=h0003, If Input Signal is changed from Off to
On status, it saves D01100=2222.
P00000
AVEP
4-176
D01000
D01100
D01200
MUX(P)
DMUX(P)
S1
S2
D
N
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
4~7
S1
S2
P S1
S2
Instruction
(D)MUX
Instruction
(D)MUXP
means (D)MUX
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
Position to select
S2
WORD/DWORD
WORD/DWORD
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
WORD
WORD
Description
If N exceeds applicable devices range
Position to select data exceeds searching range.
1) MUX
Device Number
F110
st
S2
70
S2+1
35
S2+2
S2+3
357
10
S2+(N-2)
53
S2+(N-1)
20
77
2) DMUX
(1) It transfers data applicable to No.S1 among N double word data from S2 to D.
4-177
357
4-178
D01000
D01100
D01200
D01300
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S1
S2
DETECT(P)
D
N
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
4~6
S1
S2
P S1
S2
Instruction
DETECT
Instruction
DETECTP
means DETECT
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
S2
Allowance
WORD
Range
WORD
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
WORD
WORD
st
Description
Device Number
Error
F110
Zero
F111
1) DETECT
(1) It saves the position of the 1st value out of allowance in D if the value is larger than allowance (S1) among N data
from S1 (signed operation, searching unavailable if identical to allowance), and the sum of the number of the data
larger than S1 in D+1.
(2) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.
Data to search
S2
357
S1
70
S1+1
500
S1+2
356
Data searched
Searching progress
-357
S1+(N-2)
358
S1+(N-1)
357
487
D+1
Number of data
searched (3)
2) Program Example
(1) In case of D01000=h1111, D01001=h3333,D01002=h2222, D01100=h3000, D01300=h0003, If Input Signal is
P00000 is changed from Off to On status, it saves D01200=h3333, D01201=h0001.
P00000
DETECTP
4-179
D01000
D01100
D01200
D01300
RAMP
N1
N2
D1
N3
D2
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
[Area Setting]
Operand
Con
U
st
O O
O O
O
O
-
D.x R.x
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Description
Data Type
N1
Initial value
INT
N2
Final value
INT
D1
Present value
INT
N3
WORD
D2
WORD
1) RAMP
(1) It saves the value changed from the initial to the final value in the straight line during specified N3
number of scans in D1, and the number of times of scans executed presently in D1+1.
(2) If the instruction is completed, D2 value is made 1. ( D2s No.0 bit device set )
(3) It saves the value changed from specified N1 value to N2 value in the straight line during specified N3 number of
scans executed in D1+1. And the value saved in D1+1 should be calculated per scan as follows;
X (Times executed)
250
300
350
200
Specified N1 value (0)
100
150
50
Times executed (7)
(5) If the changed value calculated per scan is not divided by an integer, let it corrected be specified n2
value from specified n3 number of times executed, which may make straight slope unavailable.
(6) It specifies the number of times of scans in n3 till executed from n1 to n2. If n3=0, there will be no operation.
(7) D1+1 used by system saves the times of executed instruction. Thus, an undesirable result may be caused if it is
modified arbitrarily by user.
(8) If the instruction is completed up to the final value, specified D2 device completed is 1.
(9) Though the instruction is Off while the instruction is executed, details of D1 (present value) are not changed. If the
instruction is back On, RAMP instruction restarts the work.
(10) Set 1 to completed device to cancel the RAMP instruction in the middle.
(11) Turn the instruction Off On to restart completed RAMP instruction after initialized.
(12) Do not change specified N1 and N2 value before specified D2+0 device completed is On. Since value to be
saved in D1+1 is calculated with the identical formula per scan, the change of N1/N2 will cause sudden effect.
4-180
4-181
D01000
D01100
D01200
D01300
D01400
SORT, DSORT
Area Available
Instruction
S
N1
N2
D1
D2
(D)SORT
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
(D)SORT
N2
D1
D2
means (D)SORT
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
N1
Description
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
N1
N2
WORD
D1
WORD
Auxiliary area
WORD
D2
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
If N1s value exceeds applicable area
If specified N1+1 aligning order is other than 0 or 1
WORD
Device Number
F110
1) SORT
(1)
It sorts (aligns) N1-point Binary 16-bit data from S1 in ascending(0)/descending(1) order based on N1+1 value.
-124
-10
35
35
-10
500
500
-124
500
35
-10
N1
-124
N1+0
N1+1
(2) Sorting by SORT instruction needs several scans. Scan times till instruction completed is the value divided by the
number of data compared with the maxiumum execution times in specified N2s 1 time execution (decimals will be
omitted). The larger N2s value is, the fewer the number of scans is and the longer scanning time is.
(3) If N2=0, the instruction will not be executed.
(4) Maximum execution times till sorting is completed shall be calculated as follow;
Maximum execution times till completed = (N1) * (N1 -1) 2 N2 [times] For example, if N=10 and S2=1, 10 * (101) 2 1=45(times). At this moment, if N2=2, 45 2 = 22.5 23 [scans] will be taken to complete sorting.
(5) Specified D1 device (completed device) saves 1 if SORT Instruction completed. After sorted, turn input contact
point (Instruction) OFF to make specified D1 devices value 0.
(6) In specified D2 device, 2-point (SORT)/4-point (DSORT) is used by system when the instruction is executed. User
shall not change 2-point (SORT)/4-point (DSORT) in specified D2 device.
(7) If N has been changed while being sorted, let it sorted with the number of sorted data after changed.
(8) If the instruction is Off while sorting executed, stop sorting. And turn the instruction On again to restart aligning.
4-182
SORT
P1000
4-183
P1100
P1200
P1300
P1400
4.25
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
O
-
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st
O
O O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
FIWR
P S
Instruction
FIWRP
means FIWR
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Data Type
Data to input
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
If data tables range after data is added exceeds applicable devices range
F110
st
1 data
2nd data
.....
Nth data
0
(1) Table size depends on how to operate. In data table process related instructions, data table size is decided
through the number of data saved in the device designated as start position of table. Thus, the table needs to be
initialized before used. If table size exceeds applicable devices range, error will occur. All the table process
instructions attach 0 to the end of the table. However, how to identify the end of the table depends on the
number of data only specified in table start address.
(2) All the data in the table will be identified in WORD format. If you want to save INT or BYTE type of data in the
table, devices data type shall be changed through MOVE Instruction, etc. In addition, Insert and Delete operation
shall be repeatedly used to save DWORD data. Data table size is unlimited. However, since the table cant
exceed device area, its maximum size is the value resulted from devices size (where table is located) minus
table start address .
(3) All the table related instructions can change the number of data, whose error can not be detected, though. That is
to say, even if user has changed the number of data abitrarily, table process instruction not knowing this takes it
for normal. Consequently, the user is recommended previously to secure table area and table size and inspect
the area before using the table instruction.
4-184
.
.
.
3) Program Example
P00000
FIWRP
4-185
P1000
P1100
PMK
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
O
-
O
-
S
D
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
FIFRD
Instruction
FIFRDP
means FIFRD
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
Error
F110
Zero
F111
(1) It reads the 1 data from specified data table S to D. The number of data in table decreases by 1, and the other
data is all moved to the device position with a decrease of 1.
(2) The specified S is number of effective data in data table.
(3) If number of data is decreased by 1, the value is filled by 0 in data table size +1.
S
S+1
S+2
S+3
.....
3
1234
2345
3456
0
Executed
S
S+1
S+2
S+3
2
2345
3456
0
....
0
0
D
1234
2) Program Example
P00000
FIFRDP
4-186
P1000
P1100
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
-
O
-
O
-
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
FILRD
Instruction
FILRDP
means FILFRD
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
Error
F110
Zero
F111
2) Program Example
P00000
FILRDP
4-187
P1000
P1100
FIINS(P)
S
D
N
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O O
O O
Step
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
FIINS
Instruction
FIINSP
means FIINS
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
WORD
Description
If data tables range exceeds applicable devices range.
If N value is larger than the present data size (speicified D) + 1
Device Number
F110
(1) It inserts specified value S in the Nth position of specified data table D. The data from the original Nth will be
pushed out to the next device number.
(2) The value of specified D is number of effective data in data table.
(3) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.
(4) If data is inserted in data table, the value in data table+1 is removed.
Executed D
D+1
1111
D+1
1111
D+2
2222
D+2
-1111
D+3
.
.
.
.
3333
D+3
2222
D+4
.
.
.
3333
-1111
2) Program Example
P00000
FIINSP
4-188
P1000
P1100
P1200
FIDEL(P)
S
D
N
PMK
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O O
O O
Step
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
FIDEL
Instruction
FIDELP
means FIDEL
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
WORD
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
If data tables range exceeds applicable devices range.
If position of data to delete exceeds table data size.
Device Number
F110
th
(1) It moves the N data of specified data table S to D. The data from the N will be pulled to the position where 1 is
decreased from the original position.
(2) The value of specified D is number of effective data in data table.
(3) If N=0, the instruction will not be executed.
(4) If data is removed in table, the value is filled by 0 in data table size +1
2) Program Example
P00000
FIDELP
4-189
P1000
P1100
P1200
4.26
PMK
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
S
D
BINDA(P)
DBINDA(P)
Con
U
Z D.x R.x
st
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
(D)BINDA
P S
Instruction
(D)BINDAP
means BINDA
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
INT/DINT
STRING
b8
b7
b0
b15
b8 b7
b0
Sign
10,000-digit ASCII code
D
1,000-digit
ASCII code
D+1 100-digit ASCII code
10-digit ASCII code
D+2 1-digit ASCII code
0
D+3
(6) For example, if 12345 is specified in S, the result after D will be saved as below;
b15
S
b0
-
b15
b8
h2D (-)
D+1
h33 (3)
h32 (2)
D+2
h35 (5)
b0
2
b0
h31 (1)
h34 (4)
h00
D+3
b15
b7
b15
b8
h33 (3)
D+1
h35 (5)
D+2
4-190
b7
b0
h32 (2)
h34 (4)
h00
b15
D
S+1
Upper 16-bit
S
Lower 16-bit
b0
b8 b7
Sign data
D+1
D+2
D+3
D+4
D+5
3) Program Example
P00000
BINDAP
4-191
P1000
P1100
BINHA(P)
DBINHA(P)
PMK
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
(D)BINHA
P S
Instruction
(D)BINHAP
means BINHA
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
BIN 32
Description
Device Number
F110
b8
b15
b7
b0
D
D+1
D+2
b15
b8 b7
b0
rd
th
3 -digit ASCII code
4 -digit ASCII code
st
nd
1 -digit ASCII code
2 digit ASCII code
0
(4) For example, if 02A6H is specified in S, the result after will be saved as below;
b15
b8
b7
b0
b15
02A6H
D
D+1
D+2
4-192
b8 b7
h32 (2)
h36 (6)
b0
h30 (0)
h41 (A)
h00
Upper 16-bit
th
rd
st
D+1
D+2
Lower 16-bit
D+3
S+1
b0
b8 b7
th
D+4
th
th
th
nd
00H
3) Program Example
P00000
BINHAP
4-193
P1000
P1100
PMK
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S
D
BCDDA(P)
DBCDDA(P)
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
2~4
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
(D)BCDDA
P S
Instruction
(D)BCDDAP
means BCDDA
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
BCD
STRING
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
b12b11
b 8b 7
b 4b 3
b0
S
1000-digit
100-digit
10-digit
D
D+1
D+2
1-digit
b15
b8 b7
b0
100-digit ASCII code 1000-digit ASCII code
1-digit ASCII code
10-digit ASCII code
0
Only if Off
(4) For example, h9105 is specified in S, the result after D will be saved as below.
b15
b12 b11
b8b7
b4b3
b0
b15
D
D+1
D+2
4-194
b8 b7
h31 (1)
h35 (5)
b0
h39 (9)
h30 (0)
h00
S+1
b16 b15
b31
b0
1 digit
1 digit
10 digits
10 digits
D+1
D+2
D+3
100 digits
1,000,000 digits
10,000,000 digits
b0
b8 b7
1,000 digit
3) Program Example
P00000
BCDDAP
4-195
P1000
P1100
DABIN(P)
DDABIN(P)
PMK
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
2~4
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
(D)DABIN
P S
Instruction
(D)DABINP
means DABIN
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Data Type
STRING
INT/DINT
Description
To be set if input ASCII data exceeds operation range
To be set if input ASCII string length exceeds the maximum string length(31)
To be set if other string than sign and 0~9 is in input ASCII string
Device Number
F110
b8 b7
b0
b15
Sign data
10000-digit ASCII code
S
S+1 100-digit ASCII code 1000-digit ASCII code
1-digit ASCII code
b0
Binary16-bit data
S
S+1
S+2
b8 b7
h32 (2)
h31 (1)
h38 (8)
b0
b15
h2D (D)
h35 (5)
h30 (0)
h00 (NULL)
4-196
b0
b0
b8 b7
Sign data
S+1
S+2
S+3
S+4
S+5
End of string
D
D+1
b0
b31
b16 b15
Upper 16-bit
Lower 16-bit
32-bit BIN data
3) Program Example
P00000
DABINP
4-197
P1000
P1100
PMK
Con
U
D.x R.x
st
O O O
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
(D)HABIN
Instruction
P
(D)HABINP
means HABIN
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Data Type
STRING
WORD/DWORD
Description
To be set if string length exceeds the maximum string length.
To be set if input data exceeds operation range
To be set if other string than 0~F is in string
Device Number
F110
S
S+1
S+2
b15
b7
b0
Binary16-bit data
b0
b8 b7
h41 (A)
h44 (D)
b8
b15
S
S+1
S+2
b0
b8 b7
3rd-digit ASCII code
h35 (5)
h38 (8)
b15
b8
b7
5A8DH
h00 (NULL)
4-198
b0
b0
b8 b7
th
th
th
th
rd
st
nd
D
D+1
b31
b16 b15
b0
Upper 16-bit
Lower 16-bit
32-bit Binary data
3) Program Example
P00000
HABINP
4-199
P1000
P1100
DABCD(P)
DDABCD(P)
PMK
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
2~4
P S
Instruction
(D)DABCD
Instruction
(D)DABCDP
means DABCD
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
Description
Data Type
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
STRING
BCD
Description
If ASCII string exceeds BCD range(0~9, h30 ~ h39 in ASCII)
If ASCII string length exceeds 4(DABCD)/8(DDABCD)
Device Number
F110
b8 b7
b15
b0
100-digit ASCII code
1000-digit ASCII code
1-digit ASCII code
10-digit ASCII code
b15
b15
b8
h37 (7)
S+1
h35 (5)
S+2
b12b11
b 8b 7
b 4b 3
b0
D
1000-digit 100-digit
b7
b15
b0
h38 (8)
b12 b11
8
10-digit
b8 b7
7
1-digit
b4 b3
6
b0
5
h36 (6)
h00 (NULL)
b0
b8 b7
S+1
S+2
S+3
D+1
b16 b15
b31
1 digit
1 digit
10 digits
10 digits
1,000,000 digits
10,000,000 digits
4-200
b0
100 digits
1,000 digit
3) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed to On, It converts ASCII code saved in D00000~D00001 to
BCD value and saved 1234 in D00010.
b15
b8
b7
h32
D0
D1
h34
D2
b0
b15
D10
h31
b12 b11
b8 b7
b4 b3
DABCDP
D00000
D00010
h38
h00 (NULL)
P00000
4-201
b0
4
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
S
D
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
2~4
Instruction
LEN
P S
Instruction
LENP
means LEN
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
STRING
WORD
1) LEN( Length )
(1) It calculates the string length saved in ASCII starting from S to save in D by 2 digits per word.
(2) Even if specified string S exceeds 31 characters with no NULL code, it will return 31 characters without any error.
b15
b8
b7
b0
h33 (3)
h32 (2)
S+1
h35 (5)
h34 (4)
b8
b15
D
b7
b0
h00
S+2
2) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed to On, the string size of 124 saved in D00000~D00001 is
calculated and 3 saved in D10.
b15
b8
b7
b0
D0
h31 (1)
h32 (2)
D1
h00
h34 (4)
b8
b15
b7
3
D10
h36
D2
P00000
LEN
4-202
D0000
D00010
b0
Instruction
S1
S2
D
STR(P)
DSTR(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
-
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
(D)STR
S1
S2
P S1
S2
Instruction
(D)STRP
means STR
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
S2
INT/DINT
STRING
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) STR (String)
(1) It converts specified Binary 16-bit data S2 with decimal places added to specified position S1, to string to save
in the next number to specified device D.
S1
Decimal places
D
D+1
D+2
Sign
D+3
D+4
S2
1st string
ASCII code
3rd string
ASCII code
5th string
ASCII code
7th string
ASCII code
ASCII code
of Sign
2nd string
ASCII code
4th string
ASCII code
6th string
ASCII code
Binary16 data
S1
.
Sign
S2
-32765
4-203
h33 (3)
h2D (-)
D+1
h2E (.)
h32 (2)
D+2
h36 (6)
h37 (7)
D+3
h00 (NULL)
h35 (5)
S1
th
Sign
S2+1
S2
b16 b15
b31
Upper 16-bit
Lower 16-bit
b0
b0
b8 b7
D+
1
D+
2
D+
3
D+
4
th
(Specified total places-9)th (Specified total places-8)
ASCII code
ASCII code
D+
5
00H
h32 (2)
h2D (-)
D+1
h34 (4)
h31 (1)
D+2
h34 (4)
h37 (7)
D+3
h38 (8)
h2E (.)
D+4
h36 (6)
h33 (3)
D+5
h35 (5)
h34 (4)
h00 (NULL)
Sign
S2+1
b31
b0
b8 b7
S2
b16 b15
-2147483645
b0
3) Program Example
P00000
STR
4-204
P1000
P1100
P1200
Instruction
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S
D1
D2
VAL(P)
DVAL(P)
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
(D)VAL
D1
D2
P S
D1
D2
Instruction
(D)VALP
means VAL
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
Description
Data Type
D1
STRING
D2
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
WORD
INT/DINT
Description
If ASCII string value is other than 0x30~0x39, Sign( -, + ) or decimal point
If ASCII string length exceeds the maximum string length
Device Number
F110
1) VAL (Value)
(1) It saves specified string S converted to Binary data in D1, and saves converted 16-bit Binary data in D2 omitting
decimals.
(2) ASCII string range is h30 ~ h39, and Error Flag will be set for others than sign and decimal point. In VAL,
convertible range of S is 32768 ~ 32767.
b15
S
S+1
S+2
S+3
b0
b8 b7
st
rd
th
Integer disregarding
decimal point
D2
th
th
2
S 1
nd
st
i
g t t
n e e
x x
t t
00H
S+4
Decimal places
D1
nd
7
th
BIN 16-bit
t
e
x
t
h33 (3)
h2D (-)
S+1
h2E (.)
h32 (2)
S+2
h36 (6)
h37 (7)
S+3
h00 (NULL)
h35 (5)
D1
- 3 2. 7 6 5
Sign
-32765
4-205
D2
S +1
S +2
b0
b8 b7
th
th
D1
Decimal places
th
S +3
S +4
00H
D2+1
D2
Integer disregarding decimal point
S 1
st
i
g t
n e
x
t
2
nd
12
t
e
x
t
t
e
x
t
BIN 32-bit
th
3) Program Example
P00000
VAL
4-206
P1000
P1100
P1200
RSTR(P)
LSTR(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
4~6
Instruction
(D)RSTR
S1
S2
P S1
S2
Instruction
(D)RSTRP
means RSTR
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1
Description
Data Type
S2
REAL/LONG
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
WORD
STRING
Description
If converted value exceeds specified area D
If specified value S2 exceeds 0~25 range
Device Number
F110
S2
b15
- 1
E + 0
Sign
S1+1
D2
D2+1
D2+2
D2+3
D2+4
b8 b7
h31 (1)
h32 (2)
h35 (5)
h2B (+)
h00 (NULL)
b0
h2D (-)
h2E (.)
h33 (3)
h45 (E)
h30 (0)
S1
-1.235E+0
4-207
Decimal places
D+1
.
Sign (integral)
S1+1
E
Sign (exponential)
S1
Added automatically
b0
b8 b7
th
th
D+2
D+3
D+4
D+5
th
th
th
45e (E)
th
D+6
00H
3) Program Example
P00000
RSTR
4-208
P1000
P1100
P1200
STRR(P)
STRL(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
STRR
P S
Instruction
STRRP
means STRR
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Data Type
STRING
REAL/LREAL
Description
1.If there is no NULL at the end of string, or ASCII data is other than 0x30~0x39, Sign,
decimal, e or E
2. If string length exceeds the maximum size
3. If input string is not of floating pointl data format
4. If input string data exceeds operation range (STRR, STRRP)
Device Number
F110
S
S+1
S+2
S+3
S+4
b8 b7
b0
b15
ASCII code of Sign
1st string ASCII code
rd
nd
th
D+1
th
"-1.23e+25"
Normal
"-123e+25"
Normal
"12345678"
Normal
"12.345"
Normal
"+12.345e-62"
"-1.23e25"
Normal
Abnormal
" 1.23e+25"
Abnormal
4-209
b0
b8 b7
34H (4)
20H (-)
S +1
2EH (.)
31H (1)
S +2
32H (2)
33H (3)
S +3
31H (1)
30H (0)
S +4
20H (+)
45H (E)
S +5
30H (0)
31H (1)
S +6
D+1
-4.1320
D
1E+11
00H
(4) Error will be set if ASCII value in string is other than 0x30~0x39, sign, decimal, eor E.
(5) STRRs operation range is -3.40282347e+038 ~ -1.17549435e-038 or 1.17549435e-038 ~ 3.402823
47e+038.
(6) In STRR(P), if input data exceeds operation range, Error will be set
If the number of effective places of input data exceeds 17, succeeding input value will be ignored.
3) Program Example
P00000
RSTR
4-210
P1000
P1100
P1200
ASC(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S
D
cw
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
Step
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
4~6
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
ASC
cw
P S
cw
Instruction
ASCP
means ASC
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
Hexadecimal Binary
STRING
WORD
N
[Flag Setting]
WORD
Flag
Error
Device
Number
F110
Description
If format regulation of cw is incorrect.
1) ASC( ASCII )
(1) It converts data in specified area S to ASCII value based on CW format to save in starting D specified.
CWs format
S D 0
n
Number to be converted (0~8)
Don't Care
D s start bit
S1s start bit
(2) It converts Binary 16-bit data as hexadecimal saved in position after specified device number S, to ASCII
to save in the range of the specified characters number n after specified device number D.
b15
b0
b8 b7
b15
b0
b8 b7
4th place
3rd place
2nd place
1st place
S+1
4th place
3rd place
2nd place
1st place
D+1
th
4 place
rd
3 place
nd
2 place
nd
nd
st
D+2
D+3
st
1 place
Binary data
4-211
Specified number
n of characters
b0
b8b7
b15
b0
b8b7
h45 (E)
h46 (F)
S+1
D+1
h31 (1)
h32 (2)
D+2
h37 (7)
h38 (8)
D+3
h41 (A)
h42 (B)
Binary data
Specified number
n of letters
(3) Setting the number of characters N will automatically set specified Binary data Ss range and specified device
Ds range to save string in.
(4) Even if the device range where Binary data to convert is saved and the device range where converted
ASCII data will be saved are duplicated, its process will be normal.
(5) If specified number of characters N is odd, 00H will be saved automatically in the upper 8 bits of the last
device number in the device range to save string in.
(6) If specified number of characters N is0, no conversion will be executed.
2) Program Example
P00000
ASC
4-212
P1000
P1100
P1200
HEX(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
Step
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
S
P S
HEX
Instruction
HEXP
means HEX
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
STRING
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
1) HEX
(1) It converts N characters from specified character S to HEX format to save in starting D.
(2) It converts Hexadecimal ASCII data saved in specified characters number N after specified device number
S to save in position after specified device number D.
b15
S2
S2+1
S2+2
S2+3
b8 b7
b0
nd
b15
D
D+1
b12 b11
b8 b7
b4 b3
b0
4th place
3rd place
2nd place
1st place
4th place
3rd place
2nd place
1st place
st
Specified number
n of letters
Binary data
b15
b0
b8 b7
h45 (E)
h66 (f)
S+1
h31 (1)
h32 (2)
S+2
h37 (7)
h38 (8)
S+3
h61 (a)
h42 (B)
b15
Specified
number N
of letters
b0
b8 b7
D+1
Binary data
4-213
2) Program Example
P00000
HEX
4-214
P1000
P1100
P1200
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S
D
N
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
4~6
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
RIGHT, LEFT
Instruction
RIGHTP, LEFTP
means RIGHT/LEFT
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
String
STRING
STRING
WORD
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Device Number
F110
1) RIGHT
(1) It saves the data of the number of characters n starting from the right (end of the string) of the string data
saved in the place after specified device number S, in the place after specified device number D.
(2) If specified number of characters N is0, NULL code (h00) will be saved in D.
(3) If specified N value is larger than specified Ss string, all S string will be saved in D, with no error this time.
b8 b7
b15
S
S+1
S+2
S+3
S+4
S+5
h42 (B)
h44
(D)
h46
(F)
h32
(2)
h34
(4)
h00
b0
h41
h43
h45
h31
h33
h35
(H)
(C)
(E)
(1)
(3)
(5)
b15
D
D+1
D+2
th
b8 b7
h32
(2)
h34
(4)
h00
b0
h31
h33
h35
(1)
(3)
(5)
"12345"
"ABCDEF12345"
2) LEFT
(1) It saves the data of the number of characters n starting from the left (start of the string) of the string data saved
in the place after specified device number S, in the place after specified device number D.
(2) If specified number of characters N is0, NULL code (h00) will be saved in D.
(3) If specified N value is larger than specified Ss string, all S string will be saved in D, with no error this time.
4-215
b8 b7
h42
h44
h46
h32
h34
h00
(B)
(D)
(F)
(2)
(4)
b0
h41
h43
h45
h31
h33
h35
"ABCDEF12345"
b15
(H)
(C)
(E)
(1)
(3)
(5)
D
D+1
D+2
D+3
b8 b7
h42
(B)
h44
(D)
h46 (F)
h00
b0
h41
h43
h45
h31
(A)
(C)
(E)
(1)
"ABCDEF1"
th
3) Program Example
(1) If Input Signal P00000 is changed to On, It saves the data 5 strings starting from the right (end of the string) of
the string among D00000~D00005 in the D00100~D00102.
P00000
RIGHT
4-216
D00000
D00100
MID(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S1
D
S2
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
S1
S2
P S1
S2
MID
Instruction
MIDP
means MID
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
STRING
STRING
S2
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
WORD
Description
1. If converted value exceeds specified area D
2. If S1 s string length exceeds the maximum string size
3. If position of head character specified in S2+0 exceeds the maximum string size
4. If the number of characters specified in S2+1 exceeds the maximum string size
Device Number
F110
1) MID (Middle)
(1) It saves the data of the number of characters specified in S2+1 starting from S2, from the left of the string data
saved in the place after specified device number S1, in the place after specified device number D.
(2) If specified S2+1s length of string is0, NULL STRING( ) will be saved in D.
b8 b7
b15
S
S+1
S+2
S+3
S+4
S+5
h42
(B)
h44
(D)
h46 (F)
h48
(H)
h4A
(J)
h00
b0
h41
h43
h45
h47
h49
h4b
(H)
(C)
(E)
(G)
(I)
(K)
b15
D
D+1
D+2
b8 b7
h46
(F)
h48
(H)
h00
b0
h45
h47
h49
(E)
(G)
(I)
"EFGHI"
"ABCDEFGHIJK"
S2
S2+1
5
5
2) Program Example
P00000
MID
4-217
P1000
P1100
P1200
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
S1
S2
P S1
S2
REPLACE
Instruction
REPLACEP
means REPLACE
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
STRING
STRING
S2
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
WORD
Description
1. If S2+1s value exceeds Ds string length
2. If S2s value exceeds Ds string length
Device Number
F110
1) REPLACE
(1) It replaces string data (from the left) saved in the position from device number D including specified S2 and
S2+1s number of characters data, with specified S1s string.
(2) If S2+1 is 0, S1 will be inserted in specified S2 position of string specified in D.
(3) If S1s string length is different from S2+1s string size, Ds string may keep increasing or deceasing, which
needs users precaution.
Before
b8 b7
b15
b8 b7
b15
S
S+1
S+2
h31 (I)
h33
(3)
h35
(5)
h00
b0
h30
h32
h34
h36
h42 (B)
h44 (D)
h46 (F)
h48 (H)
h00
D
D+1
D+2
D+3
D+4
(0)
(2)
(4)
(6)
After
b8 b7
b15
3
2
(A)
(C)
(E)
(G)
(I)
"ABCDEFGHI"
"0123456"
S2
S2+1
b0
h41
h43
h45
h47
h49
D
D+1
D+2
D+3
D+4
D+5
D+6
D+7
h42 (B)
h31
(I)
h33
(3)
h35
(5)
h45 (E)
h47 (G)
h49
(I)
h00
b0
h41
(A)
h30 (0)
h32 (2)
h34 (4)
h36 (6)
h46 (F)
h48
(H)
h00
"AB0123456EFGHI"
4-218
4-219
P1000
P1100
P1200
FIND, FINDP
Area Available
Instruction
S1
S2
D
N
FIND(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
FIND
S1
S2
P S1
S2
Instruction
FINDP
means FIND
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
S1
Data Type
STRING
S2
STRING
WORD
WORD
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Device Number
1.If S1, S2s string length exceeds the maximum string size
2.If start position to search specified in N is larger than strings length to be searched
F110
for, specified in S1
1) FIND
It searches starting Nth character of specified string S1 for the string with starting S2 to save the first identical
strings start position in D.
b15
b8 b7
b0
S1
S2
S1+1
S2+1
S1+2
T ( 0x54 )
S1+3
P ( 0x50 )
S1+4
....
C ( 0x33 )
C ( 0x43 )
T ( 0x54 )
NULL ( 0x00 )
P ( 0x50 )
2) Program Example
P00000
FIND
4-220
P1000
P1100
P1200
P1300
RBCD(P)
LBCD(P)
D.x R.x
Con
U
st
PMK
S1
S2
Step
4~6
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Instruction
RBCD, LBCD
S1
S2
P S1
S2
Instruction
RBCDP, LBCDP
means RBCD/LBCD
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
S1
S2
WORD
WORD
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
REAL/LREAL
Description
1.If converted BCD data exceeds specified area D
2.If the range of decimal places exceeds 0~7
3.If S1 value exceeds operation range
Device Number
F110
S1
D+1
BCD7places
D+2
S2
3
BCD decimal places
If plus:0
If minus:1
Sign
D+3
Sign specified
D+4
BCD exponential
S1
S1+1
-3.578 216E+2
D
D+1
S2
If plus:0
If minus:1
(0~38)
D+2
4-221
1
H3578216
D+3
D+4
3) Program Example
P00000
RBCD
4-222
P1000
P1100
P1200
BCDR(P)
BCDL(P)
D.x R.x
Con
U
st
PMK
S1
S2
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Instruction
BCDR
S1
S2
P S1
S2
Instruction
BCDRP
means BCDR
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1
S2
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Data Type
WORD
WORD
REAL/LREAL
Description
1.If specified area S1s data format is not correct
2.If the range of decimal places specified in S2 exceeds 0~7
3.If BCD exponential exceeds allowable range( BCDR(P) : 38, BCDL(P) : 290 )
Device Number
F110
S1
BCD floating decimal
point
format
S1+1
S1+2
Sign
Sign specified
S1+4
BCD exponential
S1
S1+1
S1+2
If plus:0
If minus:1
(0~38)
S1+1
S1
-3.578 216E+2
H3578216
S1+3
Sign specified
S1+4
BCD exponential
S2
D+1
BCD7places
S1+3
S2
If plus:0
If minus:1
4-223
3) Program Example
P00000
BCDR
4-224
P1000
P1100
P1200
4.27
4.27.1
SIN, SINP
Area Available
Instruction
SIN(P)
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
-
Con
U
D.x R.x
st
O O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
2~4
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
SIN
SIN
SINP
Instruction
SINP
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
LREAL
LREAL
1) SIN (Sine)
(1) It performs SIN operation of data value in specified area S to save in D. At this moment, data type of S and D is
of Double real, and internal operation will be processed after converted to Double real data.
(2) Input value is of radian. Refer to RAD for details on Conversion of angle to radian.
(3) If Ss value is 1.047(/3 rad = 600), operation result is 0.8660 ( 3 2 ).
2) Program Example
P00000
RAD
M0008
M0000
SIN
M0000
M0004
P00001
4-225
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
-
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
COS
COS
COSP
Instruction
COSP
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
LREAL
LREAL
1) COS (Cosine)
(1) It performs COS operation of data value in specified area S to save in D. At this moment, data type of S and D is
of double real.
(2) Input value is of radian. Refer to RAD for details on Conversion of angle to radian.
(3) If Ss value is 0.5235(/6 rad = 300), operation result is 0.8660 ( 3 2 ).
2) Program Example
P00000
RAD
M0008
M0000
COS
M0000
M0004
P00001
4-226
TAN, TANP
Area Available
Instruction
TAN(P)
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
-
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
TAN
TAN
TANP
Instruction
TANP
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
LREAL
LREAL
1) TAN (Tangent)
(1) It performs Tangent operation of data value in specified area S to save in D. At this moment, data type of S and D
is of double real.
(2) Input value is of radian. Refer to RAD for details on Conversion of angle to radian.
(3) If Ss value is 0.5235(/6 rad = 300), operation result is 0.5773...
2) Program Example
P00000
RAD
M0008
M0000
TAN
M0000
M0004
P00001
4-227
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
-
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
2~4
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
RAD
RAD
RADP
Instruction
RADP
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
Angle data
LREAL
LREAL
1) RAD (Radian)
(1) It converts angle (0) of data in specified area S to radian to save in D. At this moment, data type of S and D is of
double real.
(2) In degree unit, conversion to radian is as follows;
(3) Radian = Degree x /180
2) Program Example
P00003
RAD
M0000
M0002
DEG
M0002
M0004
P00004
4-228
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
-
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
2~4
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
DEG
DEG
DEGP
Instruction
DEGP
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
Radian value
LREAL
LREAL
1) DEG (Degree)
(1) It converts radian of data in specified area S to angle (degree) to save in D. At this moment, data type of S and D
is of double real.
(2) In radian unit, conversion to degree is as follows;
(3) Degree = Radian x 180 /
2) Program Example
P00003
RAD
M0000
M0002
DEG
M0002
M0004
P00004
4-229
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
-
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
2~4
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
SQRT
SQRT
SQRTP
Instruction
SQRTP
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
[Flag Setting]
Description
LREAL
LREAL
Flag
Error
Data Size
Device
Number
F110
Description
To be set if value in specified area S is negative
2) Program Example
P00001
SQRT
4-230
M0000
M0004
4.28
LIMIT(P)
DLIMIT(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
S1
S2
S3
D
Con
U
Z D.x R.x
st
O
O
O
O O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
4~7
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
S1
S2
S3
P S1
S2
S3
LIMIT,DLIMIT
Instruction
LIMITP, DLIMITP
means LIMIT/DLIMIT
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
S1
INT/DINT
S2
INT/DINT
S3
INT/DINT
INT/DINT
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Device Number
F110
1) LIMIT
(1) Function
(1) It saves controlled output value in D, based on the value available in the range designated as the
maximum/minimum of the input value specified in S1.
(2) Output Condition
,
D = S3
S1 < S3
S3 < S1 < S2
D = S1
S2 < S1
D = S2
Output D
Output
S2
Input
Input S1
S3
4-231
D00010
4-232
300
-400
D00040
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
DZONE, DDZONE
S1
S2
S3
P S1
S2
S3
Instruction
DZONEP, DDZONEP
means DZONE/DDZONE
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
S1
S2
INT
S3
INT
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
INT/DINT
INT/DINT
Description
Device Number
F110
1) DZONE
(1) It saves output value converted from input value specified in S1 based on dead zones horizontal radius and
inclination in D.
(2) Output Condition
S1 < S2
D = S1
S3
S2 + S2
100
S2 < S1 < S2
D =
S3
S1
100
S2 < S1
D = S1 +
S3
S2 S2
100
Output D
Output
Inclination S3
-S2
S2
Input
4-233
Input S1
2) Program Example
P00011
DZONE
If D00010 is -500,
If D00010 is -400,
If D00010 is -300,
If D00010 is -200,
If D00010 is
0,
If D00010 is 200,
If D00010 is 300,
If D00010 is 400,
If D00010 is 500,
4-234
D00011
D00040 = -350
D00040 = -250
D00040 = -150
D00040 = -100
D00040 =
0
D00040 = 100
D00040 = 150
D00040 = 250
D00040 = 350
300
50
D00021
Instruction
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
-
S1
VZONE(P) S2
DVZONE(P) S3
D
Con
U
Z D.x R.x
st
O
O
O
O O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
VZONE, DVZONE
S1
S2
S3
P S1
S2
S3
Instruction
VZONEP, DVZONEP
means ZONE/DZONE
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1
S2
S3
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Device number where input value to control is saved
Vertical radius of vertical zone
Reciprocal of inclination [%] in vertical zone, (0%=inf, 100%=1)
Device number to save output value in
Data Size
INT/DINT
INT
INT
INT/DINT
Description
Device Number
F110
1) VZONE
(1) It saves output value converted from input value specified in S1 based on vertical zones horizontal radius and
inclination in D.
(2) Output Condition
S1 <
S3
S2
D = S1 +
S3
S2 < S1 <
S3
S2
D =
100
100
S3
S2 S2
100
100
S3
100
S1
S3
S2 < S1
D = S1
S3
S2 + S2
100
100
Output D
Output
Reciprocal of
inclination S3
S2
Input
Input S1
-S2
4-235
2) Program Example
P00011
VZONE
If D00010 is -500,
If D00010 is -400,
If D00010 is -200,
If D00010 is -100,
If D00010 is
0,
If D00010 is 100,
If D00010 is 200,
If D00010 is 400,
If D00010 is 500,
4-236
D00011
D00040 = -650
D00040 = -550
D00040 = -350
D00040 = -200
D00040 =
0
D00040 = 200
D00040 = 350
D00040 = 550
D00040 = 650
300
50
D00021
PIDRUN
Area Available
Instruction
PIDRUN
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
-
Step
2
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
PIDRUN
PIDRUN
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
Const
2) Quick Start
(1) For simple application, PV and MV are respectively used as controllers input and output. The value user
should input is SV, MV_man, Kp, Ti and Td.
PV : Controllers input (sensor output to be controlled), AD module mainly used.
MV : Controllers Output (input signal to be controlled), DA module mainly used.
SV : Controlling target, where sensors output is input as desired to reach through the control.
MV_max : Maximum controlled output, where maximum range of controlled output is input. Usually
10000 is input. And if this value is 0, more than 0 will not be output.
Kp, Ti, Td : Where proportional, integral and differential coefficients are respectively input and tuned.
Remark
Ti value is the denominator of integral term. Thus, reduce Ti to increase integral effect, or enlarge Ti to decrease
integral effect. In case PIDRUN Block is to be deleted for modification during run, let it deleted in the state that
contact point is off. If modified during run with contact point on, the output value will be kept as before, which
causes error that control is successively performed when the identical loop is later added with contact point
always on.
Refer to additional PID Instructions List for detailed functions.
Be well informed of PIDRUN, PIDPRMT, PIDPAUSE and PIDINIT instructions to keep from any accident caused
by abnormal operation.
3) Program Example
P0
PIDRUN
4-237
Common
1
30
31
K area
Symbol
Data type
K0000
K0999
K10000~
K1001F
K10020~
K1003F
K10040~
K1005F
K10060~
K1007F
K10080~
K1009F
K10100~
K1011F
K10120~
K1013F
K10140~
K1015F
K10140~
K1015F
K10140~
K1015F
K10140~
K1015F
K10140~
K1015F
K1024
K1025
K1026
K1028
K1030
K1032
K1033
K1034
K1035
K1036
K1037
K1038
K1039
K1040
K1041
K1042
K1044
K1046
K1048
K1050
K1051
K1052
K1053
K1054
L1055
K1056
K2015
K2016
(1024+32N)
Operation in 0
--
Function
Previous model changing and User using area
_PIDxx_MAN
BIT
Auto
_PIDxx_PAUSE
BIT
Disable
PID PAUSE
_PIDxx_NEG
BIT
Positive
_PIDxx_AW_DIS
BIT
Disable
_PIDxx_EX_RUN
BIT
Disable
_PIDxx_STAT
BIT
Stop
_PIDxx_AT_EN
BIT
Stop
_PID00_AT_ONLY
BIT
_PID00_AT_HYS
BIT
Manual
_PID00_AT_STAT
BIT
Stop
_PID00_ST_EN
BIT
Disable
_PID00_INT0
BIT
_PID00_SV
_PID00_T_s
_PID00_K_p
_PID00_T_i
_PID00_T_d
_PID00_d_PV_max
_PID00_d_MV_max
_PID00_MV_max
_PID00_MV_min
_PID00_MV_man
_PID00_ALARM
_PID00_PV
_PID00_PV_old
_PID00_MV
_PID00_AT_HYS_val
_PID00_ERR
_PID00_MV_p
_PID00_MV_i
_PID00_MV_d
_PID00_AT_STEP
_PID00_ST_STEP
_PID00_AT_prd1
_PID00_AT_prd2
_PID00_AT_max
_PID00_AT_min
_PID01_SV
INT
WORD
REAL
REAL
REAL
INT
INT
INT
INT
INT
WORD
INT
INT
INT
INT
DINT
REAL
REAL
REAL
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
INT
0
Every scan
0
Disable
0
Disable
Disable
If both are
Disable
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
_PID31_SV
INT
K2047
(1055+32N)
4-238
4.28.5
PIDPRMT
Area Available
Instruction
PIDPRMT
S
D
PMK
O
-
O
-
Con
U
Z D.x R.x
st
O
O
O
-
O
-
O
-
O
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
PIDPRMT
Instruction
PIDPRMT
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
INT
Const
2) Program Example
P00000
PIDPRMT
Device
Parameter
Data type
Example
S+0
SV
[WORD]
5000
S+1
S+2
S+4
S+6
Ts
Kp
Ti
Td
[WORD]
[REAL]
[REAL]
[REAL]
10000
3.32
9.3
0.001
4-239
P1000
Real unit
System
Config.
0.1 msec
sec
sec
sec
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
-
Step
2
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
PIDPAUSE
PIDPAUSE
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
Const
P ID R U N
P ID S TO P
P ID P A U S E
3) Program Example
P0
PIDPAUSE
Remark
Before PID loop is stabilized, any system easily unstable or with external hindrance or noise highly expected shall
not be used if not surely necessary since it may cause divergence due to PIDPAUSE. In addition, its user should
monitor the system to be able to stop the system urgently anytime at PAUSE, and should not leave it in PAUSE
state for long.
4-240
PIDINIT
Area Available
Instruction
PIDINIT
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Instruction
PIDINIT
PIDSTOP
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Type
Const.
2) Program Example
P0
PIDINIT
4-241
4.29
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
Step
2
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
DATERD
D
Instruction
P D
DATERDP
means DATERD
[Area Setting]
Operand
D
Description
Data Size
WORD
b8 b7
b0
Month
Year
Hour
Date
D+1
Sec
Min
D+2
Day
D+3
100 years
H15
D+1
H40
H59
D+2
H20
H04
D+3
(4) Details of days: 0-Sunday, 1-Monday, 2-Tuesday, 3-Wednesday, 4-Thursday, 5-Friday, 6-Saturday.
2) Program Example
P00000
DATERD
4-242
P1000
PMK
DATEWR(P) D
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
Step
2
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
-
Instruction
DATEWR
Instruction
DATEWRP
means DATERD/DATEWR
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Data Size
WORD * 4
Device Number
F110
b8 b7
b0
Month
Year
Hour
Date
S+1
Sec
Min
S+2
Day
S+3
100 years
Time data
2) Program Example
P00000
DATEWR
4-243
P1000
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S1
ADDCLK(P) S2
D
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
S1
S2
P S1
S2
ADDCLK
Instruction
ADDCLKP
means ADDCLK/SUBCLK
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
S1
DWORD
S2
DWORD
DWORD
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
S1
Sec
S1+1
b15
b8 b7
b0
Hour
16#00
S2
Min
S2+1
Sec
b15
b8 b7
b0
Hour
D
16#00
Min
Sec
Min
D+1
(2) Time data value shall be input in BCD format. For example, if time data is in D00010, to which 1 hour
20 minimum 30 sec. is added to be in D20, its input will be as follows;
P00010
b15
b8 b7
b0
b15
ADDCLK
D00010
b8 b7
b0
h30200100
D00020
b15
b8 b7
b0
D00010
16#10
16#05
16#01
16#00
D00020
16#12
16#05
D00011
16#24
16#50
16#30
16#20
D00021
16#54
16#10
(3) If specified device S2s lowest byte value exists, the value in that position will be not operated.
S1
S1+1
b15
b8 b7
b0
Hour
16#20
Sec
Min
S2
S2+1
b15
b8 b7
b0
Hour
16#12
Sec
Min
b15
b8 b7
b0
Hour
D
16#20
Sec
Min
2) Program Example
P00000
ADDCLK
4-244
P1000
P1100
P1200
D+1
SUBCLK, SUBCLKP
Area Available
Instruction
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
S1
SUBCLK(P) S2
D
Con
st
-
D.x R.x
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
S1
S2
P S1
S2
SUBCLK
Instruction
SUBCLKP
means ADDCLK/SUBCLK
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
S1
DWORD
S2
DWORD
DWORD
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Device Number
F110
b8 b7
b15
b0
S1
Hour
16#00
S1+1
Sec
Min
b8 b7
b0
b15
b8 b7
b0
S2
Hour
16#00
Hour
16#00
S2+1
Sec
Min
Sec
Min
D
D+1
(2) Time data value shall be input in BCD format. For example, if time data is in D00010, from which 20 minimum 30
sec. is subtracted to be in D20, its input will be as follows;
P00010
SUBCLK
b15
b8 b7
b0
b15
b8 b7
D00010
h30200100
b0
D00020
b15
b8 b7
b0
D00010
16#10
16#05
16#01
16#00
D00020
16#09
16#05
D00011
16#24
16#50
16#30
16#20
D00021
16#54
16#29
(3) If specified device S2s lowest byte value exists, the value in that position will be not operated.
S1
S1+1
b15
b8 b7
b0
Hour
16#20
Sec
Min
S2
S2+1
b15
b8 b7
b0
Hour
16#12
Sec
b15
b8 b7
b0
Hour
D
16#20
Sec
Min
Min
2) Program Example
P00000
SUBCLK
4-245
P1000
P1100
P1200
D+1
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
S
D
SECOND(P)
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
2~4
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
SECOND
SECONDP
SECOND
Instruction
SECONDP
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Data Size
DWORD
DWORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) SECOND (Second)
(1) It converts time data value in specified area S to second data to save D+1,D.
b15
b8 b7
b0
Hour (h00~h23)
S+1
16#00
D+1
Sec. ( 0 ~ 86399 )
(2) Time data shall be input in BCD format. And if applicable data range is exceeded, error (F110) may occur
respectively.
2) Program Example
P00000
SECOND
4-246
P1000
P1100
S
D
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
D
HOUR
Instruction
P D
HOURP
means SECOND/HOUR
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
D
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Data Size
DWORD
DWORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) SECOND (Second)
(1) It converts second data in specified area S+1, S to time data to save in D+2, D+1, D.
S+1
Sec ( 0 ~ 86399 )
D
D+1
b15
b8 b7
b0
Hour (h00~h23)
16#00
Sec (h00~h23)
Min (h00~h23)
2) Program Example
P00000
HOUR
4-247
P1000
n
n
PMK
[Area Setting]
Operand
n
Con
U
D.x R.x
st
O
O
-
Step
1
5
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Description
Data Type
STRING
1) JMP
(1) If JMP (label) instructions input contact point is On, it will jump on the place after specified label (LABEL), and
all the instructions between JMP and label will not be operated.
(2) Labels duplicated can not be used. However, JMP can be duplicated.
(3) It is recommended to insert the program which shall not be operated in emergency, between JMP and label.
JMP
JMP_ST
JMP_ST
(4) If JMP instruction is executed, the process up to JME instruction with identical n will not be executed by
Jump.
2) Program Example
(1) Where Ring Counter is not executed between JMP 2 and JME 2 when input signal P0020 is On.
P00020
JMP
SKIP_RING
P00030
CTUD
P00031
C00002
100
C0002
R )
(
C0002
P00060
( R )
SKIP_RING
4-248
n
n
PMK
[Area Setting]
Operand
n
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
Step
1
5
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Description
Data Type
STRING
1) CALL
(1) If input condition is allowed while program executed, the program between SBRT n ~ RET instructions will be
executed according to CALL n instruction.
(2) CALL No. can be duplicated, and the program between SBRT n ~ RET instructions shall be at the back of
END instruction.
(3) Error processing condition
. In case the total SBRT number exceeds 512: Program downloading unavailable.
. In case CALL n exists but SBRT n dose not.
(4) Calling other SBRT is available in SBRT for 16 times.
(5) In SBRT, CALL can be located next to END.
2) Program Example
P00020
P00050
(
P00021
P00022
(
P0002F
CALL
INC_D0
END
SBRT
INC_D0
INCP
D00000
F0092
F0010
MOV
D00000
P0006
RET
4-249
P00051
4.31
Loop Instruction
PMK
Con
U
D.x R.x
st
O
-
NEXT
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2
1
FOR
FOR
[Area Setting]
Operand
Step
NEXT
Description
Data Type
WORD
1) FOR~NEXT
(1) PLC meeting FOR in RUN mode will execute the process between FOR~NEXT instructions for n times and
then the next step of NEXT instruction.
(2) 1 ~ 65535 is available for n.
(3) Up to 16 is available for NESTING of FOR~NEXT. If this is exceeded, program downloading will be unavailable.
(4) As another method to escape from FOR~NEXT loop, BREAK instruction can be used.
(5) Since scan time may be longer than expected, use WDT instruction not to exceed WDT setting limit.
2) Program Example
(1) Where PLC executes FOR~NEXT for 2 times in RUN mode.
FOR
NEXT
4-250
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
COMMAND
BREAK
BREAK
1) BREAK
(1) It is used to escape from FOR~NEXT section.
(2) BREAK instruction can not be used solely. It shall be surely used only between FOR~NEXT.
If not used between FOR~NEXT, it will cause program error to make program downloading unavailable.
2) Program Example
(1) Where M0000 if On ignores 5 times of FOR~NEXT loop inside, escapes to Loop End position and continue to
execute the operation.
FOR
5
P00051
M00000
BREAK
FOR
NEXT
NEXT
4-251
4.32
Flag Instruction
PMK
STC / CLC
Con
U
D.x R.x
st
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
STC
STC
Instruction
CLC
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Carry
CLC
Description
To be set if execution condition of STC is On
To be reset if execution condition of CLC is On
No change if STC or CLC execution condition is Off
Device Number
F112
3) Program Example
(1) Where Carry Flag(F112) will be set if input M00000 is On.
M00000
Executed
STC
Executed
4-252
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
CLE
CLE
4-253
4.33
System Instruction
4.33.1 FALS
Area Available
Instruction
FALS
PMK
Con
U
Z D.x R.x
st
O
O O
Step
2
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
FALS
N
means FALS
[Area Setting]
Operand
N
Description
Data Type
WORD
1) FALS
(1) It saves N in specified address of F area.
(2) h0000 ~ hFFFF is available for N, and the first produced N will be saved till it is cancelled.
(3) Use FALS 0000 to cancel FALS.
2) Program Example
P00000
FALS
P1000
4-254
DUTY
D
N1
N2
PMK
O
-
[Area Setting]
Operand
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Description
Data Type
F100 ~ F107
N1
Number of scans to be ON
WORD
BIT-
N2
WORD
1) DUTY
(1) It generates the pulse to make users timing pulse F area (F100~F107) specified in D, On for N1 scan and Off
for N2 scan.
(2) If input condition is Off, the timing pulse (F100~F107) will be Off.
(3) If N1 = 0, the timing pulse will be always Off.
(4) If N1 > 0, N2 = 0 , the timing pulse will be always On.
(5) If DUTY instruction operates to start to generate the timing pulse with input condition once ON, the timing
pulse will be continuously produced even if dutys input condition is Off.
2) Program Example
P0
DUTY
F01000
Remark
(1) Timing pulse will keep operating even if DUTY instruction applicable to specific timing pulse is cancelled through
modification during Run.
4-255
TFLK
D1
S1
S2
D2
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
O
-
Con
st
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
TFLK
TFLK
[Area Setting]
Operand
D1
D1
S1
Description
S2
D2
Data Type
BIT
S1
WORD
S2
WORD
D2
WORD
1) TFLK
(1) It is used to turn the specified D1 bit On for S1 time and then Off for S2 time when input contact point is On.
(2) If contact point is Off, the present time being executed in D2 will be initialized, and the bit specified in D1 will
be Off. If contact point is back On, the instruction will be executed from the first.
(3) Time unit has set to be used in D2+1.
0 1ms, 1 10ms, 2 100ms, 3 1s. If time unit is morer than 4, error will not occurred. And all is to be set
a 1s.
(4) In order to execute this instruction, 3-word data area is necessary. D2+2, D2+3, D2+4 will be used inside the
instruction for this. Thus, when setting D2, be concerned about each devices range.
2) Program Example
P00000
TFLK
4-256
P07000
P1000
P1100
P1200
WDT, WDTP
Area Available
Instruction
WDT(P)
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
WDT
Instruction
WDTP
P
means WDT
2) Program Example
P0
WDT
4-257
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
1) OUTOFF
(1) If input condition is allowed, the whole output will be Off, and internal operation will go on with F113 (whole
output Off) Flag to be set in F area.
(2) If input condition is cancelled, normal output will be followed.
2) Program Example
P0
OUTOFF
4-258
STOP
Area Available
Instruction
STOP
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
1) STOP
(1) It converts to program mode after the scan presently in progress is completed.
(2) This instruction is used to stop the operation at specific time desired.
2) Program Example
P0
STOP
4-259
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
ESTOP
ESTOP
2) Program Example
P0
ESTOP
4-260
INIT_DONE
Area Available
Instruction
INIT_DONE
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st.
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
2) Program Example
(1) If contact point P00000 becomes On, the initial task is finished.
P00000
INIT_DONE
4-261
4.34
4.34.1 EI, DI
Area Available
Instruction
EI / DI
PMK
Con
U
D.x R.x
st
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
EI
EI
DI
DI
1) EI
(1) All the prepared task programs are executed.
2) DI
(2) All the prepared task programs are not be executed.
3) Program Example
(1) It executes all of the Time-driven and Internal Task program in project.
EI
4-262
EIN, DIN
Area Available
Instruction
EIN / DIN
PMK
Con
U
st
O
-
D.x R.x
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
EIN
EIN
DIN
Instruction
DIN
[Area Setting]
Operand
n
Description
Data Type
WORD
1) EIN
(1) Specified n task program is executed.
If interrupt 5 enabled
P00001
EIN
DIN
2) DIN
(1) Specified n task program is stopped.
If interrupt 5 disenabled
P00001
Remark
Task numbering is as follows;
Cyclic cycle Task : 0~ 31
External Contact Point Task : 32 ~ 63 (It is not available to set at MasterLogic-200 series)
Internal Contact Point Task : 64 ~ 95
4-263
4.35
PMK
Con
U
D.x R.x
st
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Instruction
D
NEG, DNEG
Instruction
P D
NEGP, DNEGP
Description
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
1) NEG (Negative)
(1) It converts the sign of the detail in specified area D to save in D area.
(2) View Monitoring Option is available for monitoring if signed, and the value converted to negative is
useful only in Signed Operation.
P00001
NEGP
Classification
Area
Data
Before executed
D0010
-00030(hFFE2)
D00010
After executed
D0010
00030(h001E)
2) Program Example
(1) Where D0020 value converted to negative is calculated as signed.
M00000
NEGP
MULP
4-264
D00020
D00020
D10000
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
-
Step
2
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
D
RNEG, LNEG
Instruction
P D
LNEGP, LNEGP
means RNEG/LNEG
[Area Setting]
Operand
D
Description
Data Type
REAL/LREAL
After executed
-3.383240094
3. 383240094
P00003
RNEG
M0000
After executed
-3.3832400941234567
3. 3832400941234567
P00003
LNEG
M0000
3) Program Example
P00000
RNEG
4-265
P1000
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
-
Step
2
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
D
ABS, DABS
Instruction
P
ABSP, DABSP
means ABS/DABS
[Area Setting]
Operand
D
Description
Data Type
WORD/DWORD
classification
Area
Data
Before executed
D0010
-00030(hFFE2)
D00010
After executed
D0010
00030(h001E)
3) Program Example
P00000
ABS
4-266
P1000
4.36
PMK
Con
U
Z D.x R.x
st
O
O
-
Step
2
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
-
Instruction
RSET
RSET
[Area Setting]
Operand
S
Description
Data Type
Block number to convert, or device number ( 0~1 ) where Block number to convert is saved
WORD
Remark
Convertible block number is as follows;
2MLK-CPUH: 0~1
2MLK-CPUS: 0
Thus, as for 2MLK-CPUS, no RSET instruction will be needed.
2) Program Example
P00000
RSET
4-267
P1000
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
[Area Setting]
Operand
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Description
Data Size
S1
WORD
S2
WORD
WORD
FLASH MEMORY
0
Block 0
32767
0
Block 1
32767
D
Internal device
0
Block 31
32767
2) EDMOV (Transfer Flash Memory Double Word Data)
(1) It transfers S2+1,S2s double word data in the specified block S1 to D+1, D.
3) Program Example
P00000
EMOV
4-268
P1000
P1100
P1200
EBREAD
Area Available
Instruction
EBREAD
S1
S2
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
EBREAD
EBREAD
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1 S2
Description
Data Size
S1
WORD
S2
WORD
FLASH MEMORY
Block 0
Block 1
.
.
.
Block 31
R device
0
.
.
32767
0
.
.
32767
0
.
.
32767
0
.
.
32767
Block 0
Block 1
(S2)
0
.
.
32767
(S1)
2) Program Example
P00000
EBREAD
4-269
P1000
P1100
S1
S2
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~4
Instruction
EBWRITE
EBWRITE
[Area Setting]
Operand
S1 S2
Description
Data Size
S1
WORD
S2
WORD
Block 1
14
FLASH MEMORY
R device
Block 0
0
.
.
32767
0
.
.
32767
0
.
.
32767
0
.
.
32767
Block 0
Block 1
.
.
.
(S1)
0
.
.
32767
Block 31
(S2)
2) Program Example
P00000
EBWRITE
4-270
P1000
P1100
EBCMP
Area Available
Instruction
EBCMP
S1
S2
D1
D2
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
--
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
EBCMP
EBCMP
S1
S2
D1 D2
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
S1
WORD
S2
WORD
D1
D2
WORD
WORD
R devce
Block 0
Block 1
0
.
.
32767
0
.
.
32767
Block 0
Compare
Block 1
.
.
.
(S1)
Number of
discorded
Number of
processed
Completion
whether or not
D1
D1+1
Block 31
D2
0
.
.
32767
0
.
.
32767
0
.
.
32767
(S2)
2) Program Example
P00000
EBCMP
4-271
P1000
P1100
P1200
P1300
PMK
EERRST
Con
U
D.x R.x
st.
-
Step
1
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Type
Description
BIT 0: Reading representative Flag
BIT 1: Writing representative Flag
BIT 2: Error representative Flag
F0159
WORD
F0160
DWORD
F0162
DWORD
F0164
DWORD
2) Program Example
When contact point M00001 becomes On, it is clear the Error bit of F0159 and F0164 (DWORD)
M00001
ERRRST
4-272
4.37
4.37.1 FSET
Area Available
Instruction
FSET
PMK
Flag
Error Zero Carry
Step (F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Instruction
FSET
FSET
[Area Setting]
Operand
D
Con
U
D.x R.x
st
-
Description
Data Size
BIT
1) FSET
(1) It is to be set the bit between F10240~F2047F among the Special Relay Area F.
(2) It can be able to control the F area as shown below.
Flag Name
Data Size
Contact Point
_RTC_WR
_SCAN_WR
_CHK_ANC_ERR
_CHK_ANC_WAR
_INIT_DONE
_ANC_ERR[n]
_ANC_WAR[n]
_MON_YEAR_DT
_TIME_DAY_DT
_SEC_MIN_DT
_HUND_WK_DT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
F10240
F10241
F10242
F10243
F10250
F1026
F1027
F1034
F1035
F1036
F1037
Function
Write the data in a RTC
Initialize the Scan Value
Request the Error of external device
Request the Warning of external device
Complete the Innitializing task execution
Information of the Error of external device
Information of the Warning of external device
Data of the clock information (Month/Year)
Data of the clock information (Time/Day)
Data of the clock information (Second/Minute)
Data of the clock information (Hundred/Weekday)
3) Program Example
(1) If contact point P00000 connected with external device is changed to On, Write 100 in F1027(_ANC_WAR) and
Warning Falg become Set.
P00000
FWRITE
4-273
100
F1027
FSET
F10243
4.37.2 FRST
Area Available
Instruction
FRST
PMK
[Area Setting]
Operand
D
Con
U
D.x R.x
st.
-
Step
2
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
-
Description
Data Size
BIT
1) FRST
(1) It is used to instruction to reset the bit of F10240~F2047F in F area of Special Relay area.
(2) It is not need to use the FRST instruction because the bit of F10240 ~ F10243 area become to reset after 1 Scan
automatically even if the bit become Set.
Flag name
_RTC_WR
_SCAN_WR
_CHK_ANC_ERR
_CHK_ANC_WAR
Data size
Contact point
Reset Operation
BIT
BIT
BIT
BIT
F10240
F10241
F10242
F10243
2) Program Example
(1) Reset the No.3 bit of external Warning information area(_ANC_WAR)
(2) If P00000 is changed to On, NO3. bit of _ANC_WAR(F1027) is changed to Reset.
P00000
FRST
4-274
F10272
4.37.3 FWRITE
Area available
Instruction
S
D
FWRITE
PMK
O
-
O
O
O
-
O
-
O
-
[Area Setting]
Operand
Con
Z D.x R.x
U
st.
O - O O
-
O
-
O
-
Flag
Step Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
2~3
Description
Data Size
WORD
WORD
1) FWRITE
(1) It is used to instruction to save temporary value in word of F1024~F2047 in Special Rely in F area. The value
saved by FWRITE is removed Powerr OFF.
(2) It is used to saved the word data in area repectively when detect the external device Error or Warning.
2) Program Example
(1) If P00001 connected with external device is changed to On, data of 1234 is witten in F1026(_ANC_ERR) and
the request of detection of external device Error flag become Set. So PLC operation status is changed to Error
status.
P00001
FWRITE
1234
FSET
4-275
F1026
F10242
4.38
GET(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
Con
U
D.x R.x
st
O
O
O
O O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
GET
sl
P sl
Instruction
GETP
means GET
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
Description
Data Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
PUT/GET
Error
Description
If there is no special module installed on specified slot
If PUT/GET instruction is not completed correctly
Device Number
F0015 ~ F0022
1) GET
(1) This instruction is used to read the data of special module with memory.
(2) It saves N word data from special modules memory (specified in S: address) specified in sl (special modules
slot number) to internal device area specified in D.
(3) If there is no special module specified in sl (special modules slot number), or GET instruction is not completed
correctly, applicable position bit of PUT/GET Error Flag, F0015~F0022(WORD) will be set.
(4) The setting method of sl (slot number of special module) is to set the 2 places of Hexadecimal. If sl h10 is same
as below program, first number 1 is a base number and second 0 means a slot number.
M00021
GET
4-276
h10
100
D00100
P00001
GET
4-277
h03
D00010
PUT(P)
sl
S
D
N
PMK
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
-
O
-
O
-
O
-
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
4~7
Instruction
PUT
sl
S1
S2
sl
S1
S2
Instruction
PUTP
means PUT
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
sl
WORD
S1
WORD
S2
Start number of Device or a Constant, saved data will be saved in special module.
WORD
WORD
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
PUT/GET
Error
Description
If there is no special module installed on specified slot
If PUT/GET instruction is not completed correctly
Device Number
F0015 ~ F0022
1) PUT
(1) This instruction is used to write the data in special module with memory.
(2) It writes N word data from device specified in S2, in specified special modules memory (specified in S) in sl
(special modules slot number).
(3) If there is no special module specified in sl (special modules slot number), or PUT instruction is not completed
correctly, applicable position bit of PUT/GET Error Flag, F0015~F0022(WORD) will be set.
(4) The setting method of sl (slot number of special module) is to set the 2 places of Hexadecimal. If sl h14 is same
as below program, first number 1 is a base number and second 4 means a slot number.
M00021
PUT
h14
D00100
b15
b0
F0015
F0016
.
.
.
4-278
h07
10
D1000
40
(2)Where the 3-word data of word M00010 ~ M00012 is written in A/D modules internal memory address 5 ~ 7
installed on the slot number 3 of No.0 base.
M00000
PUT
4-279
h03
M00010
4.39
4.39.1 P2PSN
Area Available
Instruction
P2PSN
N1
N2
N3
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Con
Z D.x R.x
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
P2PSN
P2PSN
[Area Setting]
Operand
N1
N2
Description
N3
Data Size
N1
P2P number ( 1 ~8 )
WORD
N2
Block number( 0 ~ 63 )
WORD
Station number ( 0 ~ 63 )
WORD
N3
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Device Number
F110
1) P2PSN
(1) P2PSN instruction is used to change the others P2P service station No. during run.
(2) It changes N1 P2Ps N2 block remote station No. to N3.
(3) Applicable Communication module : FDEnet, Cnet.
2) Error
(1) If N1(1~8), N2(0~63), N3(0~63)s value exceeds the applicable range, Error Flag(F110) will be set.
3) Program Example
P00000
P2PSN
4-280
P1000
P1100
P1200
P2PWRD
Area Available
Instruction
P2PWRD
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
4~6
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Instruction
P2PWRD
P2PWRD
[Area Setting]
Operand
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
N1
N2
N3
N4 N5
Description
Data Size
P2P number ( 1 ~ 8 )
Block number( 0 ~ 63 )
Variable number ( 1 ~ 4 )
Variable size [n byte] ( 0 ~ 1400 )
Device
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) P2PWRD
(1) P2PWRD instruction is used to change applicable P2P parameter blocks variable size and WORD
READ device area.
(2) Use N1, N2 and N3 to specify applicable P2P parameter, block and variable and then change variable
size and device to N4 and N5 respectively.
(3) Applicable communication modules: FEnet, FDEnet, Cnet.
2) Error
(1) If N1 (1~8), N2 (0~63), N3 (1~4), N4 (0~1400)s value exceeds the applicable range, Error Flag (F110) will be
set.
3) Program Example
P00000
P2PWRD
P1000
P1100
P1200
P1300
P1400
Remark
(1) As for individual instruction, 1~4 is used for variable number (N3) with no variable size (N4) applied.
(2) As for continuous instruction, 1 is always used for variable number (N3) with variable size (N4) applied.
(3) Variable size (N4) is used in byte unit.
4-281
P2PWWR
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
st
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
P2PWWR
P2PWWR
[Area Setting]
Operand
N1
N2
N3
N4 N5
Description
Data Size
N1
N2
N3
P2P number ( 1 ~ 8 )
Block number( 0 ~ 63 )
Variable number ( 1 ~ 4 )
WORD
WORD
WORD
N4
WORD
Device
WORD
N5
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Device Number
F110
1) P2PWWR
(1) P2PWWR instruction is used to change applicable P2P parameter blocks variable size and WORD WRITE
device area.
(2) Use N1, N2 and N3 to specify applicable P2P parameter, block and variable and then change variable size and
device to N4 and N5 respectively.
(3) Applicable communication modules: FEnet, FDEnet, Cnet.
2) Error
(1) If N1 (1~8), N2 (0~63), N3 (1~4), N4 (0~1400)s value exceeds the applicable range, Error Flag (F110) will be
set.
3) Program Example
P00000
P2PWWR
P1000
P1100
P1200
P1300
P1400
Remark
(1) As for individual instruction, 1~4 is used for variable number (N3) with no variable size (N4) applied.
(2) As for continuous instruction, 1 is always used for variable number (N3) with variable size (N4) applied.
(3) Variable size (N4) is used in byte unit.
4-282
P2PBRD
Area Available
Instruction
P2PBRD
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
Con
st
O
O
O
O
O
-
D.x R.x
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
-
Step
4~6
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Instruction
P2PBRD
P2PBRD
[Area Setting]
Operand
N1
N2
N3
N4 N5
Description
Data Size
N1
P2P Number ( 1 ~ 8 )
WORD
N2
Block Number( 0 ~ 63 )
WORD
N3
variable Number ( 1 ~ 4 )
WORD
N4
WORD
Device
WORD
N5
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Device Number
F110
1) P2PBRD
(1) P2PBRD instruction is used to change applicable P2P parameter blocks variable size and BIT READ device
area.
(2) Use N1, N2 and N3 to specify applicable P2P parameter, block and variable and then change variable size and
device to N4 and N5 respectively.
(3) Applicable communication modules: FEnet, FDEnet, Cnet.
2) Error
(1) If N1 (1~8), N2 (0~63), N3 (1~4), N4 (0~1400)s value exceeds the applicable range, Error Flag (F110) will be
set.
3) Program Example
P00000
P2PBRD
P1000
P1100
P1200
P1300 P1400
Remark
(1) As for individual instruction, 1~4 is used for variable number (N3) with no variable size (N4) applied.
(2) As for continuous instruction, 1 is always used for variable number (N3) with variable size (N4) applied.
(3) Variable size (N4) is used in byte unit.
4-283
P2PBWR
N1
N2
N3
N4
N5
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
Con
st
O
O
O
O
O
-
D.x R.x
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~6
Instruction
P2PBWR
P2PBWR
[Area Setting]
Operand
N1
N2
N3
N4 N5
Description
Data Size
N1
P2P number ( 1 ~ 8 )
WORD
N2
Block number ( 0 ~ 63 )
WORD
N3
Variable number ( 1 ~ 4 )
WORD
N4
WORD
Device
WORD
N5
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
Description
Device Number
F110
1) P2PBWR
(1) P2PWR instruction is used to change applicable P2P parameter blocks variable size and BIT WRITE device
area.
(2) Use N1, N2 and N3 to specify applicable P2P parameter, block and variable and then change variable size and
device to N4 and N5 respectively.
(3) Applicable communication modules: FEnet, FDEnet, Cnet.
2) Error
(1) If N1 (1~8), N2 (0~63), N3 (1~4), N4 (0~1400)s value exceeds the applicable range, Error Flag (F110) will be
set.
3) Program Example
P00000
P2PBWR
P1000
P1100
P1200
P1300
P1400
Remark
(1) As for individual instruction, 1~4 is used for variable number (N3) with no variable size (N4) applied.
(2) As for continuous instruction, 1 is always used for variable number (N3) with variable size (N4) applied.
(3) Variable size (N4) is used in byte unit.
4-284
4.40
4. 40.1 ORG
Area Available
Instruction
ORG
sl
ax
PMK
Con
U
Z D.x R.x
st
O
O
O
-
Step
4~7
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
ORG
ORG
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
[Flag Setting]
ax
Description
Data Size
WORD
Axis to instruction
WORD
Flag
Error
sl
Description
Device Number
F110
1) ORG
(1) Function
(1) It is used to the positioning module to return to Origin Point.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl (positioning modules slot
number) to return to Origin Point.
(2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to
the properties of the special module.
2) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number 1 to
return to Origin Point.
M00000
P
ORG
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed on the
slot number 3 to return to Origin Point.
M00000
P
ORG
4-285
D00010
sl
ax
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
FLT
FLT
sl
ax
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
[Flag Setting]
Description
WORD
Axis to instruction
WORD
Flag
Error
Data Size
Description
Device Number
F110
1) FLT
(1) Function
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to set the Floating point.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl (positioning modules slot
number) to set Floating Origin Point.
(2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
2) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to set Floating Point.
M00000
P
FLT
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to return to Origin Point.
4-286
DST
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
DST
DST
sl
ax
n1
n2
n3
n4
n5
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
n2
n3
n4
n5
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on
Axis to instruction
Target position
Target speed
Dwell time
M code number
Control word
Data Size
WORD
WORD
DWORD
DWORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
1) DST
(1) It is used to instruction the positiong module to start directly.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl (positioning modules slot
number) to start directly.
(3) The axis to perform the instruction outputs the pulse with Target Position (n1), Target Speed (n2), Dwell Time
(n3), M Code (n4).
(4) Control Word (n5) has meaning of as described below per bit.
15 ~ 7
-
6~5
Adjusting
Time
4
0: Absolute coordinate
1: Relative coordinate
3~1
-
0
0:Position Control
1:Speed Control
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed module,
Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the properties of
the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it outputs the pulse to instruction the positioning modules axis X installed on the
slot number 1 to start directly, with Target Speed 500, Absolute Position up to 1000, Adjusting Time 3, Dwell Time
10ms and M Code 20.
M00000
P
DST
4-287
1000
500
10
20
hE0
IST
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
4~7
Instruction
IST
IST
sl
ax
n1
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on
Axis to instruction
Step number to start
Flag
Data Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
1) IST
(1) It is used to instruction the positiong module to start indirectly.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl (positioning modules slot
number) to start n1 step indirectly.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
2) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to start No.3 step indirectly.
M00000
P
IST
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis Y installed on the slot number
3 to start the step specified in D00010 indirectly.
M00000
P
IST
4-288
D00010
LIN
sl
ax
n1
n2
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
4~7
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
LIN
LIN
sl
ax
n1
n2
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
n2
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on
Axis to instruction
Step number to execute linear Interpolation
Axis setting to execute linear Interpolation
Data Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
1) LIN
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to set the Linear Interpolatioin.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl (positioning modules slot
number) to let n2 axis operate n1 step by Linear Interpolation.
(3) In order to set the axis to perform Linear Interplation to n2, the bit of the axis assigned per bit shall be set as
follows;
15 ~ 3
Unused
2
Z axis
1
Y axis
0
X axis
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
2) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to let No.4 step operate 2 axes of X & Y by Linear Interplation.
M00000
P
LIN
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis Y installed on the slot number
3 to let the step specified in D00010 operate 3 axes of X, Y & Z by Linear Interplation.
4-289
CIN
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
4~7
Instruction
CIN
CIN
sl
ax
n1
n2
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
n2
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on
Axis to instruction
Step number to execute Circular Interpolation
Ordinate axis setting to execute Circular Interpolation
Data Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
1) CIN
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to set the Linear Interpolatioin.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl (positioning modules slot
number) to let n2 axis (as servant) operate n1 step by Circular Interplation.
(3) In order to set the axis of ordinates to perform Linear Interplation to n2, the bit of the axis assigned per bit shall
be set as follows;
15 ~ 3
Unused
2
Z axis
1
Y axis
0
X axis
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number 1 to let
No.4 step operate 2 axes of X (main) & Y (slave) by Circular Interplation.
M00000
P
CIN
1 0
4
2
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis Y installed on the slot number 3 to let
the step specified in D00010 operate the axes of Y (main) & Z (slave) by Circular Interplation.
M00000
P
CIN
4-290
D00010
SST
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
SST
SST
sl
ax
n1
n2
n3
n4
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
sl
ax
n1
n2
n3
n4
Data Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
1) SST
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to set the simultaneous Start.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl (positioning modules slot
number) to let the axes simultaneously operate n1 (X), n2 (Y) and n3 (Z) steps by Simultaneous Start.
(3) In order to set the axis (n4) to perform Simultaneous Start, the bit of the axis assigned per bit shall be set as
follows.
15 ~ 3
Unused
2
Z axis
1
Y axis
0
X axis
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number 1 to let the
axes simultaneously operate n1(X), n2 (Y) and n3 (Z) steps by Simultaneous Start.
M00000
P
SST
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis Y installed on the slot number
3 to let the axes simultaneously operate the step specified in D00010 (X) and n10 step (Y) by Simultaneous
Start.
M00000
P
SST
4-291
D00010
10
sl
ax
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
VTP
VTP
sl
ax
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on
Axis to instruction
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) VTP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to switch Speed/Position control.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl (positioning modules slot
number) to switch Speed/Position Control.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to switch Speed/Position Control
M00000
P
VTP
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to switch Speed/Position Control.
M00000
P
VTP
4-292
D00010
sl
ax
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
PTV
PTV
sl
ax
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on
Axis to instruction
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) PTV
(1) It is used to inatruction the positioning module to switch Position/Speed control.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl (positioning modules slot
number) to switch Position/Speed Control.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to switch Position/Speed Control
M00000
P
PTV
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to switch Position/Speed Control.
M00000
P
PTV
4-293
D00010
STP
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
STP
STP
sl
ax
n1
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Decelerating Time ( 0~ 65535 )
Flag
Data Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
1) STP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to stop as decelerated.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl (positioning modules slot
number) to stop as decelerated.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to stop as decelerated.
M00000
P
STP
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to stop as decelerated.
M00000
P
STP
4-294
D00010
SKP
Area Available
Instruction
sl
ax
SKP
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
SKP
SKP
sl
ax
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on
Axis to instruction
Flag
Data Size
WORD
WORD
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
1) SKP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to Skip.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl (positioning modules slot
number) to skip.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed module,
Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the properties
of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number 1 to skip.
M00000
P
SKP
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed on the slot
number 3 to skip.
M00000
P
SKP
4-295
D00010
SSP
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
sl
ax
n1
n2
n3
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
SSP
SSP
sl
ax
n1
n2
n3
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
n2
n3
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on
Axis to instruction
Main axiss position value to execute Position Synchronization
Step number of instruction axis to operate when Position Synchronization starts
Main axis Setting for Position Synchronization
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
DWORD
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) SSP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to synchronize the position.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl (positioning modules slot
number) to execute synchoronizing the position to operate n2 step of the axis ax when the main axis of n3 is to
with n1.
(3) The available setting value on n3 is as described below.
Setting value
0
1
2
3
Axis
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
Encoder
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number 1 to
execute synchronizing the position to operate n3 step of the axis X when the main axis of Y is to synchronize
the position with 1000.
M00000
P
SSP
4-296
1000
SSS
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
SSS
SSS
sl
ax
n1
n2
n3
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
n2
n3
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on
Axis to instruction
Main axis ratio of Speed Synchronization
Slave axis ratio of Speed Synchronization
Setting main axis of Speed Synchronization
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) SSS
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to synchronize the speed.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl (positioning modules slot
number) to execute synchronizing the speed to operate the main axis of n3 with main axis ratio of n1 and slave
axis ratio of n2.
(3) The available setting value on n3 is as described below.
Setting Value
0
1
2
3
Axis
X axis
Y axis
Z axis
Encoder
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number 1 to
execute synchronizing the speed to operate the main axis of Y with a main and slave axis ratio of 4 : 3.
M00000
P
SSS
4-297
POR
sl
ax
n1
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
POR
POR
sl
ax
n1
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on
Axis to instruction
Target position to change
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
DWORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) POR
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to override position.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl( positioning modules slot
number) to override position to change the target position to n1 during run.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to override position to change its target position to 20000.
M00000
P
POR
20000
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to override position to change its target position to the value specified in D00020.
M00000
P
POR
4-298
D00010
D00020
SOR
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
4~7
Instruction
SOR
SOR
sl
ax
n1
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on
Axis to instruction
Target Speed to change
Flag
Data Size
WORD
WORD
DWORD
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
1) SOR
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to override the speed.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to override speed to change the target speed to n1 during run.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to override speed to change its target speed to 5000
M00000
P
POR
5000
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to override speed to change its target speed to the value specified in D00020.
M00000
P
POR
4-299
D00010
D00020
PSO
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
PSO
PSO
sl
ax
n1
n2
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
n2
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on
Axis to instruction
Position to change speed
Target speed to change
Flag
Data Size
WORD
WORD
DWORD
DWORD
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
1) PSO
(1)It is used to instruction the positioning module to override position-specified.
(2)It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to override position-specified speed to change the target speed to n2 when the present position is n1
during run.
(2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
2) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to override position-specified speed to change its target speed to 2000 when the present position is
5000.
M00000
P
PSO
5000
2000
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to override position-specified speed to change its target speed to the value
specified in D00030 when the present position is D00020.
M00000
P
PSO
4-300
D00010
D00020
D00030
PMK
sl
ax
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
NMV
NMV
sl
ax
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) NMV
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to operate continuously.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to operate continuously during run. If the instructioned axis ax is running n step, it will change position
and speed to target position and target speed specified in (n+1) as soon as instructioned.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to operate continuously.
M00000
P
NMV
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to operate continuously.
M00000
P
NMV
4-301
D00010
INCH
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
INCH
INCH
sl
ax
n1
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Target Position
Flag
Data Size
WORD
WORD
DWORD
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
1) INCH
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to inch.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to inch by n1.
(2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
2) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to inch by 100.
M00000
P
NMV
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to inch by 10 backward.
M00000
P
NMV
4-302
D00010
RTP
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
RTP
RTP
sl
ax
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Flag
Data Size
WORD
WORD
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
1) RTP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to return to position previous to manual operation.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to return to position previous to manual operation.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to return to position previous to manual operation.
M00000
P
RTP
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to return to position previous to manual operation.
M00000
P
RTP
4-303
D00010
-SNS
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
sl
ax
n1
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
SNS
SNS
sl
ax
n1
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Setting step number of next operation
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) SNS
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to change operation step to the next step.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to change operation step to the next step n1.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to change operation step to the next step number 10.
M00000
P
SNS
10
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change operation step to the next step value specified in D00020.
M00000
P
SNS
4-304
D00010 D00020
SRS
sl
ax
n1
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
SRS
SRS
sl
ax
n1
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Setting step of repeated operation
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) SRS
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to chage pepeated operation step.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to change repeated operation step to n1.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to change repeated operation step to step number 10.
M00000
P
SNS
10
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change repeated operation step to the value specified in D00020.
M00000
P
SNS
4-305
D00010
D00020
MOF
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
MOF
MOF
sl
ax
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Flag
Data Size
WORD
WORD
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
1) MOF
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to make produced M code Off.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to make produced M code Off so to delete the value of M code.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to make produced M code off so to delete the value of M code.
M00000
P
MOF
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to make produced M code off so to delete the value of M code.
M00000
P
MOF
4-306
D00010
PRS
sl
ax
n1
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
4~7
Instruction
PRS
PRS
sl
ax
n1
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Setting present position to change.
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
DWORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) PRS
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to change present position.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to change present position to n1.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to change present position to -100.
M00000
P
PRS
-100
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change present position to the value specified in D00020.
M00000
P
PRS
4-307
D00010
D00020
PMK
sl
ax
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
Step
4~7
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
ZOE
ZOE
sl
ax
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) ZOE
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to allw zone output.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to allow zone output.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to allow zone output.
M00000
P
ZOE
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to allow zone output.
M00000
P
ZOE
4-308
D00010
PMKL F
sl
ax
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
ZOD
ZOD
sl
ax
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) ZOD
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to prohibit zone output.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to prohibit zone output.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to prohibit zone output
M00000
P
ZOD
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to prohibit zone output.
M00000
P
ZOD
4-309
D00010
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
sl
ax
n1
EPRS
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
ERPS
ERPS
sl
ax
n1
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Setting encoder value to change
Flag
Data Size
WORD
WORD
DWORD
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
1) EPRS
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to change present Encoder Value.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to change present Encoder Value to n1.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to change present Encoder Value to -100.
M00000
P
EPRS
-100
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change present Encoder Value to the value specified in D00020.
M00000
P
EPRS
4-310
D00010
D00020
TEA
sl
ax
n1
n2
n3
n4
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
TEA
TEA
sl
ax
n1
n2
n3
n4
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
n2
n3
n4
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Teaching Data (target position or target speed)
Setting step number to teach
Setting teaching method (0: RAM teaching or 1: ROM teaching)
Setting teaching item (0: Position teaching or 1: Speed teaching)
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
DWORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) TEA
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning
modules slot number) to change target position or target speed to n1 value, according to n4 value
among n2 step data of the axis ax.
(3) It is available to RAM teaching or ROM teaching according to the setting value of n3.
Setting value available for n4 is as shown below
Setting Value
0
1
Teaching Method
RAM Teaching
ROM Teaching
Teaching Item
Position Teaching
Speed Teaching
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number 1 to
change target position of step number 10 of the axis X to 3000 with ROM Teaching.
M00000
P
TEA
4-311
3000
10
TEAA
sl
ax
n1
n2
n3
n4
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
TEAA
TEAA
sl
ax
n1
n2
n3
n4
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
n2
n3
n4
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Setting head step number to teach
Setting teaching method (0: RAM teaching or 1: ROM teaching)
Setting teaching item (0: Position teaching or 1: Speed teaching)
Setting the number of teaching
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) TEAA
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to teaching array.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to change target position or target speed to the value saved in teaching data area, according to n2 as
many as the number specified in n1 ~ n4 steps of the axis ax with teaching array. At this time, based on the
value specified in n3, RAM or ROM teaching will be available.
Setting value available for n2 is as shown below;
Setting Value
0
1
Teaching Method
RAM Teaching
ROM Teaching
Teaching Item
Position Teaching
Speed Teaching
(3) Teaching data value shall be specified in memory area inside an additional positioning module before teaching
array instruction is given.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number 1 to
change target speed of 5 steps starting from step number 10 of the axis X with RAM Teaching Array.
M00000
P
TEAA
4-312
10
sl
ax
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
EMG
EMG
sl
ax
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) EMG
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to perform Emergent Stop.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to perform Emergent Stop.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to perform Emergent Stop.
M00000
P
EMG
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to perform Emergent Stop.
M00000
P
EMG
4-313
D00010
CLR
sl
ax
n1
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
CLR
CLR
sl
ax
n1
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Setting prohibited output to clear
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) CLR
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning to reset generated Error.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to reset generated error to delete. Clearing the prohibited output state is available based on specified
n1.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to reset generated error to delete, and to clear prohibited output state.
M00000
P
CLR
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to reset generated error to delete.
M00000
P
CLR
4-314
D00010
PMK
sl
ax
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
Step
4~7
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
ECLR
ECLR
sl
ax
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) ECLR
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to reset the Error history.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to reset saved error history to delete.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to reset saved error history to delete.
M00000
P
ECLR
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to reset saved error history to delete.
M00000
P
ECLR
4-315
D00010
sl
ax
PMK
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
PST
PST
sl
ax
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Number of Point Operation Data
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) PST
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to perform Point Operation.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to perform Point Operation, based on step value saved in Point Operation Data area.
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number 1 to
perform Point Operation with the data saved in Point Operation Data area of the axis X.
M00000
P
PST
4-316
TBP
sl
ax
n1
n2
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
TBP
TBP
sl
ax
n1
n2
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
n2
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Teaching Data (changed value of the item to change among basic parameters)
Item to change among basic parameters.
Flag
Error
Description
Data Size
WORD
WORD
DWORD
WORD
Device Number
F110
1) TBP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module with basic parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to change n2 to n1 among basic parameters, with basic parameters teaching.
Setting Value
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Item
Speed Limit
Bias Speed
Adjusting Time 1
Adjusting Time 2
Adjusting Time 3
Adjusting Time 4
Pulses per rotation
Distance per rotation
Pulse output mode
Unit
Unit multiple
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
4-317
M00000
P
TBP
200000
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change bias speed to the value specified in D00020 among basic parameters,
with basic parameters teaching.
M00000
P
TBP
4-318
D00010
D00020
TEP
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
sl
ax
n1
n2
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
TEP
TEP
sl
ax
n1
n2
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
n2
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Teaching Data (changed value of the item to change among extended parameters)
Item to change among extended parameters.
Flag
Error
Description
Data Size
WORD
WORD
DWORD
WORD
Device Number
F110
1) TEP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning with extended parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to change n2 to n1 among extended parameters, with extended parameters teaching.
Setting
Value
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
13
14
15
Item
Maximum of S/W
Minimum of S/W
Backlash Compensation
Output Time of Positioning Complete
S-Curve Rate
Select External Instruction
Pulse Output Direction
Adjusting Pattern
M Code Mode
Display Position during Uniform Operation
Detect Maximum/Minimum during Uniform
Operation
External Speed/Position Control Switching
Allowed
External Instruction Allowed
External Stop Allowed
Simultaneous External Start Allowed
16
12
1:allowed
0:prohibited 1:allowed
0:prohibited 1:allowed
0:prohibited 1:allowed
0:Dwell Time
1:In-Position Sign
2: Dwell Time AND In-Position Sign
3: Dwell Time OR In-Position Sign
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
4-319
TEP
100
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change External Stop Allowed to the value specified in D00020 among extended
parameters, with extended parameters teaching.
M00000
P
TEP
4-320
D00010
D00020
14
THP
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
4~7
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
THP
THP
sl
ax
n1
n2
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
n2
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Teaching Data (changed value of the item to change among returned parameters to origin )
Item to change among returned parameters to origin
Flag
Description
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
DWORD
WORD
Device Number
F110
1) THP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module with returned parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to change n2 to n1 among returned parameters to origin point, with returned parameters teaching.
Setting
Value
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Item
Address of Origin Point
Return to Origin Point, High Speed
Return to Origin Point, Low Speed
Return to Origin Point, Adjusting Time
Return to Origin Point, Dwell Time
Compensation of Origin Point
Return to Origin Point, Restart Time
0: DOG/Origin Point(OFF)
1: DOG/Origin Point(ON)
2: Maximum& Minimum/Origin Point
3:DOG
4: Return to Origin Point at High Speed
5: Maximum & Minimum
0:Forward
1:Reverse
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
4-321
THP
100
(3) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change Address of Origin Point to the value specified in D00020 among
returned parameters to origin point, with returned parameters teaching.
M00000
P
THP
4-322
D00010
D00020
TMP
sl
ax
n1
n2
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
4~7
Instruction
TMP
TMP
sl
ax
n1
n2
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
n2
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Teaching Data (changed value of the item to change among manual parameters)
Item to change among manual parameters
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
DWORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) TMP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module with manual parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to change n2 to n1 among manual parameters, with manual parameters teaching.
(3) Setting value of n2 is as shown below.
Setting Value
1
2
3
4
Item
Jog High Speed
Jog Low Speed
Jog Adjusting Time
Inching Speed
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to change Jog High Speed to 5000 among manual parameters of the axis X, with manual
parameters teaching.
M00000
P
TMP
500
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change Jog Adjusting Time to the value specified in D00020 among manual
parameters, with manual parameters teaching.
M00000
P
TMP
4-323
D00010
D00020
TSP
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
sl
ax
n1
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O --
O
O
O
O
O
O
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
4~7
Instruction
TSP
TSP
sl
ax
n1
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Teaching Data(changed value of input signal parameter)
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) TSP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module with Input Signal parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to change its input signal parameter to n1, with input signal parameters teaching.
(3) Each bit of n1 value is assigned to input signal. If the bits value is o, its applicable signal will be identified as A
contact point, and if the bits value is 1, its applicable signal will be identified as B contact point.
Bit
0
1
2
3
4
5
Input signal
Maximum Signal
Minimum Signal
Near Origin Point Signal
Origin Point Signal
Emergent Stop Signal
Decelerated Stop Signal
Bit
6
7
8
9
10
11 ~ 15
Input signal
Instruction Signal
Auxiliary Instruction Signal
Speed/Position Control Switching Signal
In-Position Signal
External Simultaneous Start Signal
Unused
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to change Emergent Stop Signal to B contact point among input signal parameters of the axis X,
with input signal parameters teaching
M00000
P
TSP
h0010
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change input signal parameter to the value specified in D00020, with input
signal parameters teaching.
M00000
P
TSP
4-324
D00010
D00020
TCP
sl
ax
n1
n2
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
COMMAND
TCP
TCP
sl
ax
n1
n2
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
n2
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Teaching Data (changed value of the item to change among common parameters)
Item to change among common parameters
Flag
Error
Description
Data Size
WORD
WORD
DWORD
WORD
Device Number
F110
1) TCP
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module with common parameters teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to change n2 to n1 among common parameters, with common parameters teaching.
(3) Setting value available for n2 is as shown below;
Setting
Value
1
2
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Item
0:Low Active 1:High Active
0:Middle point 1:Central point
0:CW/CCW(1-Phase 1-multiplier)
1:CW/CCW(1-Phase 2-multiplier)
2:Pulse/Dir(1-Phase 1-multiplier)
3:Pulse/Dir(1-Phase 2-multiplier)
4:PhaseA/B(2-Phase 1-multiplier)
5:PhaseA/B(2-Phase 2-multiplier)
6:PhaseA/B(2-Phase 4-multiplier)
0:Individual Output
1:Total Output
0:X axis
4-325
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis X installed on the slot number
1 to change Pulse Output Level to High Active among common parameters, with common parameters
teaching.
M00000
P
TCP
(2) If input signal M00000 is On, it instructions the positioning modules axis specified in D00010 installed
on the slot number 3 to change Encoder Pulse Input Mode to the value specified in D00020, with
common parameters teaching
M00000
P
TCP
4-326
D00010
D00020
WRT
sl
ax
n1
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
WRT
WRT
sl
ax
n1
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
n1
[Flag Setting]
Description
WORD
Axis to instruction
WORD
WORD
Flag
Error
Data Size
Description
Device Number
F110
1) WRT
(1) It is used to the instruction moduel to save parameter.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to save presently run parameter of the axes n1, in Flash ROM. In order to set the axis to save
parameter in n4, the bit of the axis assigned per bit shall be set as follows;
3~ 15
Unused
2
Z axis
1
Y axis
0
X axis
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
M00000
P
WRT
4-327
P1100
P1200
SRD
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
SRD
SRD
sl
ax
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
D
[Flag Setting]
Description
Data Size
WORD
Axis to instruction
WORD
WORD
Flag
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
1) SRD
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module to read its present status.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to read its present status so to save in CPU area specified in D.
(3) Value to be saved in CPU area specified in D is as shown below;
CPU Area
D
D+1
D+2
D+3
D+4
D+6
D+8
D+9
D+10
D+11 ~ D+20
D21
Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
DWORD
DWORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
DWORD
Status Type
Operation Status Information 1
Operation Status Information 2
Axis Information
External Input Signal Status
Present Position
Present Speed
Step Number
M Code Number
Error Information
Error History 1 ~ 10
Encoder Value
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F2001) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
P00000
SRD
4-328
P1100
P1200
PWR
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
sl
ax
n1
n2
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
4~7
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
O
Instruction
PWR
PWR
sl
ax
n1
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
S
n1
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Head aderess of Device which is saved in point operation data
Number of point operation step
Flag
Error
Data Size
WORD
WORD
WORD
WORD
Description
Device Number
F110
1) PWR
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to move the value of point operation step to be used to the axis ax of the positioning module as many
as n1 from CPU area specified in S.
(2) Number of point operation steps to be specified in n1 is 1 ~ 20.
(3) Value to read from CPU area specified in S is as below;
CPU Area
S
~
S+19
Size
WORD
~
WORD
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F0110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
P00000
PWR
4-329
P1200
P1300
P1400
TWR
PMK
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
-
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Step
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
4~7
Instruction
TWR
TWR
sl
ax
n1
[Area Setting]
Operand
sl
ax
S
n1
[Flag Setting]
Description
Slot number positioning module is installed on.
Axis to instruction
Head address of Device which is saved data of plural teaching
Number to plural teaching
Flag
Data Size
WORD
WORD
DWORD
WORD
Description
Error
Device Number
F110
1) TWR
(1) It is used to instruction the positioning module the teaching data value to be used for plural teaching.
(2) It is used to instruction the positioning modules specified axis ax installed on sl(positioning modules slot
number) to move the teaching data value to be used for plural teaching, to the axis ax of the positioning
module as many as n1 from CPU area specified in S.
(3) Number of point operation steps to be specified in n1 is 1 ~ 16.
(4) Value to read from CPU area specified in S is as below.
CPU Area
S
~
S+19
Size
DWORD
Teaching Data
Teaching Data 1
~
Teaching Data 16
DWORD
2) Error
(1) If a value more than 2 is input in specified instruction axis ax, Error Flag (F0110) will be set.
(2) If there is no special module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
P00000
TWR
4-330
P1200
P1300
P1400
4.41
4.41.1
GETM, GETMP
Area Available
Instruction
sl
S
D
N
GETM(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
Con
U
D.x R.x
st
O
O
O
O
-
O
-
O
-
O
-
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
4~7
Instruction
GETM
sl
sl
Instruction
GETMP
means GETM
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
sl
WORD
WORD
D
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
DWORD
DWORD
Description
1. If there is no module on the specified slot.
2. If no address specified in S is available in the installed module on the specified slot.
Device Number
F110
1) GETM, GETMP
(1) This instruction is used to read the data of motion module.
(2) It reads N double word data from the memory of the motion module specified in sl(special modules slot
number) to save in CPU area specified in sl.
2) Error
(1) If the area from specified address S to N exceeds the applicable block, error may occur. This error is blocked,
not to be input in Present SoftMaster-200.
(2) If there is no motion module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) It reads 4-word data from motion modules fixed area address 0 to address 3 installed on the slot number 3 of
the base number 0, to save in D0010 ~ D00013.
P00001
GETM
4-331
03
D00010
D00010
100
100
D00011
120
120
D00012
130
130
190
190
D00013
4-332
PUTM, PUTMP
Area Available
Instruction
sl
S
D
N
PUTM(P)
PMK
O
O
O
O
D.x R.x
-
Con
U
st
O
O
O
O
-
O
-
O
-
O
-
Flag
Error Zero Carry
(F110) (F111) (F112)
Step
4~7
Instruction
PUTM
sl
S1
S2
sl
S1
S2
Instruction
PUTMP
means PUTM
[Area Setting]
Operand
Description
Data Size
sl
WORD
S1
WORD
S2
Device name & number where data to save in motion module is saved.
N
[Flag Setting]
Flag
Error
DWORD
WORD
Description
1. If there is no module on the specified slot.
2. If no address specified in S is available in the installed module on the specified slot.
Device Number
F110
1) PUTM, PUTMP
(1) This instruction is used to write the data in motion module.
(2) It writes N double word data from the specified device S2 in the memory (S1) of the motion module specified in
sl (special modules slot number).
2) Error
(1) If the area from specified address S1 to N exceeds the applicable block, error may occur. This error is blocked,
not to be input in Present SoftMaster-200.
(2) If there is no motion module on the specified slot, or no address specified in S is available in the installed
module, Error Flag (F110) will be set. This is because the fixed area address may be different according to the
properties of the special module.
3) Program Example
(1) If input signal M00000 is On, it writes the 40-word of D1000 ~D1049 in motion modules memory address 10 ~
47 installed on the slot number 7.
M00000
PUTM
4-333
10
D1000
20
(1) Decimal
Decimal is number of signs 0 ~ 9 used to express order and size (quantity).
After 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, ..9, 10 will be continued with 2 figures increased.
For example, decimal 153 will be expressed as shown below in the aspect of row and value weighted of row
Appendix 1-1
Binary
Decimal
0
1
10
11
100
101
110
111
1000
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
Lets think about the sum of the multiplication of each bits code value weighted as in decimal.
= 1128+064+032+116+18+14+02+11
= 128+16+8+4+1
= 157
In other words, binary is the result of code of 1 plus bit value weighted
Appendix 1-2
Hexadecimal as similarly as above is number of signs 0 ~ 9 and A ~ F used to express order and size .
After 0, 1, 2, D,E,F, 10 will be continued with 2 figures increased.
Decimal
Hexadecimal
Binary
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
F
10
11
12
0
1
10
11
100
101
110
111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
10000
10001
10010
9 1 0 1
0100
Appendix 1-3
1010
1001
1101
Thus, binary coded decimal displays decimal 0 ~ 9999 (max. of 4 rows) in 16 bits.
Each bits value weighted is as follows;
Appendix 1-4
Binary (BIN)
Decimal
Hexadecimal (H)
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000001
00000010
00000011
00000100
00000101
00000100
00000111
00001000
00001001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000001
00000010
00000011
00000100
00000101
00000100
00000111
00001000
00001001
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0000
0001
0002
0003
0004
0005
0006
0007
0008
0009
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
00010001
00010010
00010011
00010100
00010101
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00001010
00001011
00001100
00001101
00001110
00001111
10
11
12
13
14
15
000A
000B
000C
000D
000E
000F
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000110
00000111
00001000
00001001
00100000
00100001
00100010
00100011
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00010000
00010001
00010010
00010011
00010100
00010101
00010110
00010111
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
0010
0011
0012
0013
0014
0015
0016
0017
00000001
00000001
00000010
00010000
00100000
01000000
10011001
00000000
00100111
01010101
00000000
01000111
10010101
10011001
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000000
00000111
00100111
01111111
01100100
01111111
11111111
11100000
11111111
11111111
00001111
00010000
11111111
100
127
255
1000
2047
4095
9999
10000
32767
0064
007F
00FF
03E8
07FF
0FFF
270F
2710
7FFF
Appendix 1-5
2)
In case of 16 bits
b16
b0
Sign bit
0: displays 0 and
positive number
1: displays
negative number
Displayed range:-32768~32767
In case of 32 bits
b31
b16
Sign bit
b15
0: displays 0 and
positive number
1: displays
negative number
b0
0
b0
1
b0
1
-0001 = hFFFF
Appendix 1-6
b0
Appendix 2-1
Appendix 2-2
END
TON
END
TON
P00
Timers
internal coil
Scan
+1
0 Scan
+1
-1 Scan
+1
Scan
-1
Appendix 2-3
END
TON
Device 2
F0000
Type
Variable
Function
DWORD _SYS_STATE
Description
F00000
BIT
_RUN
RUN
RUN status.
F00001
BIT
_STOP
STOP
STOP status.
F00002
BIT
_ERROR
ERROR
ERROR status.
F00003
BIT
_DEBUG
DEBUG
DEBUG status.
F00004
BIT
_LOCAL_CON
Local control
F00005
BIT
_MODBUS_CON
F00006
BIT
_REMOTE_CON
Remote mode
F00008
BIT
F00009
BIT
F0000A
BIT
F0000B
BIT
F0000C
BIT
_CMOD_KEY
Run Mode
F0000D
BIT
_CMOD_LPADT
Run Mode
F0000E
BIT
_CMOD_RPADT
Run Mode
F0000F
BIT
_CMOD_RLINK
Run Mode
F00010
BIT
_FORCE_IN
Compulsory input
F00011
BIT
_FORCE_OUT
Compulsory output
F00012
BIT
_SKIP_ON
I/O SKIP
F00013
BIT
_EMASK_ON
Error mask
F00014
BIT
_MON_ON
Monitor
F00015
BIT
_USTOP_ON
STOP
F00016
BIT
_ESTOP_ON
ESTOP
F00017
BIT
_CONPILE_MODE compiling
F00018
BIT
_INIT_RUN
Initializing
F0001C
BIT
_PB1
Program code 1
F0001D
BIT
_PB2
Program code 2
F0001E
BIT
_CB1
Compile code 1
F0001F
BIT
_CB2
Compile code 2
Appendix 3-1
Device 1
Device 2
F0002
Type
Variable
DWORD _CNF_ER
Function
Description
System error
F00020
BIT
_CPU_ER
CPU error
F00021
BIT
_IO_TYER
F00022
BIT
_IO_DEER
Module
installation error
Module displaced.
F00023
BIT
_FUSE_ER
Fuse error
Fuse blown.
F00024
BIT
_IO_RWER
F00025
BIT
_IP_IFER
F00026
BIT
_ANNUM_ER
F00028
BIT
_BPRM_ER
F00029
BIT
_IOPRM_ER
Module interface
error
External
equipment Error
Basic parameter
IO parameter
Special module
Special module parameter abnormal.
parameter
Communication
Communication module parameter
module
abnormal.
parameter
F0002A
BIT
_SPPRM_ER
F0002B
BIT
_CPPRM_ER
F0002C
BIT
_PGM_ER
Program error
F0002D
BIT
_CODE_ER
Code error
F0002E
BIT
_SWDT_ER
System watchdog
F0002F
BIT
F00030
BIT
_WDT_ER
Scan watch-dog
System warning
F0004
DWORD _CNF_WAR
F00040
BIT
_RTC_ER
RTC error
F00041
BIT
_DBCK_ER
Back-up error
F00042
BIT
_HBCK_ER
Restart error
F00043
BIT
_ABSD_ER
F00044
BIT
_TASK_ER
Task impact
F00045
BIT
_BAT_ER
Battery error
F00046
BIT
_ANNUM_WAR
External
equipment error
F00047
BIT
_LOG_FULL
Memory full
F00048
BIT
_HS_WAR1
HS link 1
F00049
BIT
_HS_WAR2
HS link 2
F0004A
BIT
_HS_WAR3
HS link 3
F0004B
BIT
_HS_WAR4
HS link 4
F0004C
BIT
_HS_WAR5
HS link 5
F0004D
BIT
_HS_WAR6
HS link 6
F0004E
BIT
_HS_WAR7
HS link 7
F0004F
BIT
_HS_WAR8
HS link 8
F00050
BIT
_HS_WAR9
HS link 9
F00051
BIT
_HS_WAR10
HS link 10
Appendix 3-2
Device 1
Device 2
Type
F00052
BIT
_HS_WAR11
HS link 11
F00053
BIT
_HS_WAR12
HS link 12
F00054
BIT
_P2P_WAR1
P2P parameter 1
F00055
BIT
_P2P_WAR2
P2P parameter 2
F00056
BIT
_P2P_WAR3
P2P parameter 3
F00057
BIT
_P2P_WAR4
P2P parameter 4
F00058
BIT
_P2P_WAR5
P2P parameter 5
F00059
BIT
_P2P_WAR6
P2P parameter 6
F0005A
BIT
_P2P_WAR7
P2P parameter 7
F0005B
BIT
_P2P_WAR8
P2P parameter 8
F0005C
BIT
F0009
Variable
WORD _USER_F
Function
Description
F00090
BIT
_T20MS
20ms
F00091
BIT
_T100MS
100ms
F00092
BIT
_T200MS
200ms
F00093
BIT
_T1S
1s
CLOCK of 1s cycle.
F00094
BIT
_T2S
2s
CLOCK of 2s cycle.
F00095
BIT
_T10S
10s
F00096
BIT
_T20S
20s
F00097
BIT
_T60S
60s
F00099
BIT
_ON
Always ON
F0009A
BIT
_OFF
Always OFF
F0009B
BIT
_1ON
1 scan ON
F0009C
BIT
_1OFF
1 scan OFF
F0009D
BIT
_STOG
Reverse
User CLOCK
F0010
WORD _USER_CLK
F00100
BIT
_USR_CLK0
F00101
BIT
_USR_CLK1
F00102
BIT
_USR_CLK2
F00103
BIT
_USR_CLK3
F00104
BIT
_USR_CLK4
F00105
BIT
_USR_CLK5
F00106
BIT
_USR_CLK6
F00107
BIT
_USR_CLK7
Appendix 3-3
Device 1
Device 2
F0011
Type
Variable
Function
Description
WORD
_LOGIC_RESULT
Logic result
F00110
BIT
_LER
Calculation error
F00111
BIT
_ZERO
Zero flag
ON if calculation result is 0.
F00112
BIT
_CARRY
Carry flag
F00113
BIT
_ALL_OFF
Whole output
OFF
F00115
BIT
_LER_LATCH
_CMP_RESULT
Compared result
F0012
WORD
F00120
BIT
_LT
LT flag
ON if less than
F00121
BIT
_LTE
LTE flag
F00122
BIT
_EQU
EQU flag
ON if equal
F00123
BIT
_GT
GT flag
ON if greater than
F00124
BIT
_GTE
GTE flag
F00125
BIT
_NEQ
NEQ flag
ON if not equal
F0013
WORD
_AC_F_CNT
F0014
WORD
_FALS_NUM
FALS number
F0015
WORD
_PUTGET_ERR0
PUT/GET error 0
F0016
WORD
_PUTGET_ERR1
PUT/GET error 1
F0017
WORD
_PUTGET_ERR2
PUT/GET error 2
F0018
WORD
_PUTGET_ERR3
PUT/GET error 3
F0019
WORD
_PUTGET_ERR4
PUT/GET error 4
F0020
WORD
_PUTGET_ERR5
PUT/GET error 5
F0021
WORD
_PUTGET_ERR6
PUT/GET error 6
F0022
WORD
_PUTGET_ERR7
PUT/GET error 7
F0023
WORD
_PUTGET_NDR0
PUT/GET complete 0
F0024
WORD
_PUTGET_NDR1
PUT/GET complete 1
F0025
WORD
_PUTGET_NDR2
PUT/GET complete 2
F0026
WORD
_PUTGET_NDR3
PUT/GET complete 3
F0027
WORD
_PUTGET_NDR4
PUT/GET complete 4
F0028
WORD
_PUTGET_NDR5
PUT/GET complete 5
F0029
WORD
_PUTGET_NDR6
PUT/GET complete 6
F0030
WORD
_PUTGET_NDR7
PUT/GET complete 7
F0044
WORD
_CPU_TYPE
CPU type
F0045
WORD
_CPU_VER
CPU version
F0046
DWORD _OS_VER
OS version
OS version displayed.
F0048
DWORD _OS_DATE
OS date
Appendix 3-4
Device 1
Device 2
Type
Variable
Function
Description
F0050
WORD
_SCAN_MAX
F0051
WORD
_SCAN_MIN
F0052
WORD
_SCAN_CUR
F0053
WORD
_MON_YEAR
Month / Year
F0054
WORD
_TIME_DAY
Hour / Date
F0055
WORD
_SEC_MIN
Second / Minute
F0056
WORD
_HUND_WK
FPU calculation
result
Incorrect error
latch
F0057
WORD
_FPU_INFO
F00570
BIT
_FPU_LFLAG_I
F00571
BIT
_FPU_LFLAG_U
Underflow latch
F00572
BIT
_FPU_LFLAG_O
Overflow latch
F00573
BIT
_FPU_LFLAG_Z
Latch divided by 0
Latched if divided by 0.
Latched if invalid calculation.
F00574
BIT
_FPU_LFLAG_V
Invalid calculation
latch
F0057A
BIT
_FPU_FLAG_I
Incorrect error
F0057B
BIT
_FPU_FLAG_U
Underflow
F0057C
BIT
_FPU_FLAG_O
Overflow
F0057D
BIT
_FPU_FLAG_Z
Division by 0
Reported if divided by 0.
F0057E
BIT
_FPU_FLAG_V
Invalid calculation
_FPU_FLAG_E
Irregular value
input
F0057F
BIT
F0058
DWORD _ERR_STEP
Error step
F0060
DWORD _REF_COUNT
Refresh
F0062
DWORD _REF_OK_CNT
Refresh OK
F0064
DWORD _REF_NG_CNT
Refresh NG
Refresh LIMIT
F0066
DWORD _REF_LIM_CNT
F0068
DWORD _REF_ERR_CNT
Refresh ERROR
_MOD_RD_ERR_
DWORD
CNT
_MOD_WR_ERR
DWORD
_CNT
Module READ
ERROR
Module WRITE
ERROR
F0074
DWORD _CA_CNT
Block service
F0076
DWORD _CA_LIM_CNT
F0078
DWORD _CA_ERR_CNT
F0080
F0082
DWORD _PUT_CNT
PUT count
F0084
DWORD _GET_CNT
GET count
F0086
DWORD _KEY
Present key
F0088
DWORD _KEY_PREV
Previous key
F0070
F0072
Block service
LIMIT
Block service
ERROR
Appendix 3-5
Device 1 Device 2
Type
Variable
Function
Description
Slot number with discordant module type
displayed.
Slot number with displaced module
displayed.
F0090
WORD _IO_TYER_N
Discordant slot
F0091
WORD _IO_DEER_N
Displaced slot
F0092
WORD _FUSE_ER_N
F0093
WORD _IO_RWER_N
RW error slot
F0094
WORD _IP_IFER_N
IF error slot
F0096
WORD _IO_TYER0
F0097
WORD _IO_TYER1
F0098
WORD _IO_TYER2
F0099
WORD _IO_TYER3
F0100
WORD _IO_TYER4
F0101
WORD _IO_TYER5
F0102
WORD _IO_TYER6
F0103
WORD _IO_TYER7
F0104
WORD _IO_DEER0
F0105
WORD _IO_DEER1
F0106
WORD _IO_DEER2
F0107
WORD _IO_DEER3
F0108
WORD _IO_DEER4
F0109
WORD _IO_DEER5
F0110
WORD _IO_DEER6
F0111
WORD _IO_DEER7
F0112
WORD _FUSE_ER0
F0113
WORD _FUSE_ER1
F0114
WORD _FUSE_ER2
F0115
WORD _FUSE_ER3
F0116
WORD _FUSE_ER4
F0117
WORD _FUSE_ER5
F0118
WORD _FUSE_ER6
F0119
WORD _FUSE_ER7
F0120
WORD _IO_RWER0
Module RW 0 error
F0121
WORD _IO_RWER1
Module RW 1 error
F0122
WORD _IO_RWER2
Module RW 2 error
F0123
WORD _IO_RWER3
Module RW 3 error
F0124
WORD _IO_RWER4
Module RW 4 error
F0125
WORD _IO_RWER5
Module RW 5 error
F0126
WORD _IO_RWER6
Module RW 6 error
F0127
WORD _IO_RWER7
Module RW 7 error
Appendix 3-6
Device 1
Device 2
F0128
Type
WORD
Variable
Function
_IO_IFER_0
Module IF 0 error
Description
Main base module interface error
Added base step 1 module interface
error
Added base step 2 module interface
error
Added base step 3 module interface
error
Added base step 4 module interface
error
Added base step 5 module interface
error
Added base step 6 module interface
error
Added base step 7 module interface
error
F0129
WORD
_IO_IFER_1
Module IF 1 error
F0130
WORD
_IO_IFER_2
Module IF 2 error
F0131
WORD
_IO_IFER_3
Module IF 3 error
F0132
WORD
_IO_IFER_4
Module IF 4 error
F0133
WORD
_IO_IFER_5
Module IF 5 error
F0134
WORD
_IO_IFER_6
Module IF 6 error
F0135
WORD
_IO_IFER_7
Module IF 7 error
F0136
WORD
_RTC_DATE
RTC date
F0137
WORD
_RTC_WEEK
RTC day
F0138
DWORD _RTC_TOD
RTC time
F0140
DWORD _AC_FAIL_CNT
Power-cut times
F0142
DWORD _ERR_HIS_CNT
Errors found
F0144
DWORD _MOD_HIS_CNT
Mode conversion
times
F0146
DWORD _SYS_HIS_CNT
History updated
F0148
DWORD _LOG_ROTATE
Log rotate
F0150
WORD
_BASE_INFO0
F0151
WORD
_BASE_INFO1
F0152
WORD
_BASE_INFO2
F0153
WORD
_BASE_INFO3
F0154
WORD
_BASE_INFO4
F0155
WORD
_BASE_INFO5
F0156
WORD
_BASE_INFO6
F0157
WORD
_BASE_INFO7
F0158
WORD
_RBANK_NUM
Used block
number
F0159
WORD
_RBLOCK_STATE
Flash status
Flash Read
F0160
DWORD _RBLOCK_RD_FLAG
F0162
F0164
DWORD _RBLOCK_ER_FLAG
Flash error
_USER_WRITE_F
Available contact
point
F1024
F1025
WORD
F10240
BIT
_RTC_WR
RTC RW
F10241
BIT
_SCAN_WR
Scan WR
F10242
BIT
_CHK_ANC_ERR
F10243
BIT
_CHK_ANC_WAR
WORD
_USER_STAUS_F
Detect external
serious error
Detect external
slight error
User contact
point
Appendix 3-7
Device 1
Device 2
Type
F10250
BIT
Variable
_INIT_DONE
Function
Initialization
complete
External serious
error information
External slight
error information
Description
Initialization complete displayed.
Serious error information in external
equipment displayed.
Slight error information in external
equipment displayed.
F1026
WORD _ANC_ERR
F1027
WORD _ANC_WAR
F1034
F1035
WORD _TIME_DAY_DT
Hour / Date
F1036
WORD _SEC_MIN_DT
Second / Minute
F1037
WORD _HUND_WK_DT
Appendix 3-8
Contact
Instruction
Unite
Instruction
Reverse
Master
Control
Output
Instruction
S/C
End
No
Operation
Timer
Instruction
Counter
Instruction
1)
Instruction
LOAD
LOAD NOT
LOADP
LOADN
AND
AND NOT
ANDP
ANDN
OR
OR NOT
ORP
ORN
AND LOAD
OR LOAD
MPUSH
MLOAD
MPOP
NOT
MCS
MCSCLR
OUT
OUT NOT
SET
RST
OUTP
OUTN
FF
LOAD Sxx.yy
AND Sxx.yy
OR Sxx.yy
LOAD NOT S
AND NOT S
OR NOT S
SET S
OUT S
END
NOP
TON
TOFF
TMR
TMON
TRTG
CTD
CTU
CTUD
CTR
Nonexecuted
84
84
252
252
84
84
252
252
84
84
252
252
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
168
168
168
168
336
420
336
252
252
252
252
252
252
252
252
9000
Executed
N=1
84
84
252
252
84
84
252
252
84
84
252
252
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
84
168
168
168
168
336
420
336
2100
1932
2352
2100
1932
2352
1260
1932
1)
9000
84
6468
5040
3192
5712
6048
1722
1722
3696
1722
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
N=8 or X
Nonexecuted
28
28
84
84
28
28
84
84
28
28
84
84
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
56
56
56
56
112
140
112
700
644
784
700
644
784
420
644
3000
Executed
N=1
28
28
84
84
28
28
84
84
28
28
84
84
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
56
56
56
56
112
140
112
700
644
784
700
644
784
420
644
1)
3000
84
28
28
10626
7896
10626
8568
8568
4872
8148
9240
8610
2156
1680
1064
1904
2016
574
574
1232
574
3542
2632
3542
2856
2856
1624
2716
3080
2870
If using the timer, the execution time of timer is as added as number of timer.
Appendix 4-1
Executed
N=8 or X
Data
Transfer
Instruction
Convert
Instruction
Convert
Instruction
Instruction
MOV
MOVP
DMOV
DMOVP
RMOV
RMOVP
LMOV
LMOVP
MOV4
MOV4P
MOV8
MOV8P
CMOV
CMOVP
DCMOV
DCMOVP
GMOV
GMOVP
FMOV
FMOVP
BMOV
BMOVP
GBMOV
GBMOVP
$MOV
$MOVP
BCD
BCDP
DBCD
DBCDP
BIN
BINP
DBIN
DBINP
GBCD
GBCDP
GBIN
GBINP
I2R
I2RP
I2L
I2LP
D2R
D2RP
D2L
D2LP
R2I
R2IP
R2D
R2DP
L2I
L2IP
L2D
L2DP
Nonexecuted
252
420
252
420
252
420
420
588
504
672
504
672
252
420
252
420
420
588
420
588
420
588
504
672
336
504
336
504
336
504
336
504
336
504
420
588
420
588
336
504
336
504
336
504
336
504
336
504
336
504
420
588
420
588
Executed
N=1
252
420
252
420
252
420
1596
1764
6426
6594
6426
6594
336
504
336
504
8358
8526
4662
4830
3108
3276
9618
9786
16674
16842
1722
1890
1806
1974
1680
1848
1764
1932
9408
9576
9324
9492
1638
1806
4830
4998
1554
1722
4662
4830
3150
3318
3150
3318
3234
3402
3234
3402
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
N=8 or X
11592
11760
7308
7476
17556
17724
20580
20748
19908
20076
Appendix 4-2
Nonexecuted
84
140
84
140
84
140
140
196
168
224
168
224
84
140
84
140
140
196
140
196
140
196
168
224
112
168
112
168
112
168
112
168
112
168
140
196
140
196
112
168
112
168
112
168
112
168
112
168
112
168
140
196
140
196
Nonexecuted
84
140
84
140
84
140
532
588
2142
2198
2142
2198
112
168
112
168
2786
2842
1554
1610
1036
1092
3206
3262
5558
5614
574
630
602
658
560
616
588
644
3136
3192
3108
3164
546
602
1610
1666
518
574
1554
1610
1050
1106
1050
1106
1078
1134
1078
1134
Executed
N=1
3864
3920
2436
2492
5852
5908
6860
6916
6636
6692
Comparing
Instruction
Compare
Instruction
Compare
Instruction
(16 Bit
Integer)
Instruction
CMP
CMPP
DCMP
DCMPP
CMP4
CMP4P
CMP8
CMP8P
TCMP
TCMPP
DTCMP
DTCMPP
GEQ
GEQP
GGT
GGTP
GLT
GLTP
GGE
GGEP
GLE
GLEP
GNE
GNEP
LOAD=
LOAD>
LOAD<
LOAD>=
LOAD<=
LOAD<>
AND=
AND>
AND<
AND>=
AND<=
AND<>
OR=
OR>
OR<
OR>=
OR<=
OR<>
Nonexecuted
336
504
336
504
504
672
504
672
420
588
420
588
504
672
504
672
504
672
504
672
504
672
504
672
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
Executed
N=1
1764
1932
1764
1932
6552
6720
6552
6720
17724
17892
20664
20832
9198
9366
9198
9366
9198
9366
9198
9366
9198
9366
9198
9366
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
N=8 or X
15372
15540
15372
15540
15372
15540
15372
15540
15372
15540
15372
15540
Appendix 4-3
Nonexecuted
112
168
112
168
168
224
168
224
140
196
140
196
168
224
168
224
168
224
168
224
168
224
168
224
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
Nonexecuted
588
644
588
644
2184
2240
2184
2240
5908
5964
6888
6944
3066
3122
3066
3122
3066
3122
3066
3122
3066
3122
3066
3122
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
Executed
N=1
5124
5180
5124
5180
5124
5180
5124
5180
5124
5180
5124
5180
Compare
Instructioin
(32 bit
Integer)
Compare
Instructioin
(4 bit
Integer)
Compare
Instructioin
(8 bit
Integer)
Instruction
LOADD=
LOADD>
LOADD<
LOADD<=
LOADD>=
LOADD<>
ANDD=
ANDD>
ANDD<
ANDD>=
ANDD<=
ANDD<>
ORD=
ORD>
ORD<
ORD
ORD =
ORD
LOAD4=
LOAD4>
LOAD4<
LOAD4>=
LOAD4<=
LOAD4<>
AND4=
AND4>
AND4<
AND4>=
AND4<=
AND4<>
OR4=
OR4>
OR4<
OR4>=
OR4<=
OR4<>
LOAD8=
LOAD8>
LOAD8<
LOAD8>=
LOAD8<=
LOAD8<>
AND8=
AND8>
AND8<
AND8>=
AND8<=
AND8<>
OR8=
OR8>
OR8<
OR8>=
OR8<=
OR8<>
Nonexecuted
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
Executed
N=1
504
504
504
504
504
504
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
6132
6132
6132
6132
6132
6132
5964
5964
5964
5964
5964
5964
6468
6468
6468
6468
6468
6468
6132
6132
6132
6132
6132
6132
5964
5964
5964
5964
5964
5964
6468
6468
6468
6468
6468
6468
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
N=8 or X
Appendix 4-4
Nonexecuted
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
Executed
N=1
168
168
168
168
168
168
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
2044
2044
2044
2044
2044
2044
1988
1988
1988
1988
1988
1988
2156
2156
2156
2156
2156
2156
2044
2044
2044
2044
2044
2044
1988
1988
1988
1988
1988
1988
2156
2156
2156
2156
2156
2156
Executed
N=8 or X
Compare
Instructioin
(16 bit
group)
Real
Compare
Instruction
(Single Real
Number)
Real
Compare
Instruction
(Double Real
Number)
Instruction
LOADG=
LOADG>
LOADG<
LOADG>=
LOADG<=
LOADG<>
ANDG
ANDG>
ANDG<
ANDG>=
ANDG<=
ANDG<>
ORG
ORG>
ORG<
ORG>=
ORG<=
ORG<>
LOADR=
LOADR>
LOADR<
LOADR>=
LOADR<=
LOADR<>
ANDR=
ANDR>
ANDR<
ANDR>=
ANDR<=
ANDR<>
ORR=
ORR>
ORR<
ORR>=
ORR<=
ORR<>
LOADL=
LOADL>
LOADL<
LOADL>=
LOADL<=
LOADL<>
ANDL=
ANDL>
ANDL<
ANDL>=
ANDL<=
ANDL<>
ORL=
ORL>
ORL<
ORL>=
ORL<=
ORL<>
Nonexecuted
1848
1848
1848
1848
1848
1848
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
504
Executed
N=1
8274
8274
8274
8274
8274
8274
8106
8106
8106
8106
8106
8106
8610
8610
8610
8610
8610
8610
1596
1596
1596
1596
1596
1596
1428
1428
1428
1428
1428
1428
1932
1932
1932
1932
1932
1932
1764
1764
1764
1764
1764
1764
1596
1596
1596
1596
1596
1596
2100
2100
2100
2100
2100
2100
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
N=8 or X
12684
12684
12684
12684
12684
12684
12516
12516
12516
12516
12516
12516
13020
13020
13020
13020
13020
13020
Appendix 4-5
Nonexecuted
616
616
616
616
616
616
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
168
Executed
N=1
2758
2758
2758
2758
2758
2758
2702
2702
2702
2702
2702
2702
2870
2870
2870
2870
2870
2870
532
532
532
532
532
532
476
476
476
476
476
476
644
644
644
644
644
644
588
588
588
588
588
588
532
532
532
532
532
532
700
700
700
700
700
700
Executed
N=8 or X
4228
4228
4228
4228
4228
4228
4172
4172
4172
4172
4172
4172
4340
4340
4340
4340
4340
4340
String
Compare
Instruction
Operand
Compare
Instruction
(16 bit
integer)
Operand
Compare
Instrucion
(32 bit
Integer)
Instruction
LOAD$=
LOAD$>
LOAD$<
LOAD$>=
LOAD$<=
LOAD$<>
AND$=
AND$>
AND$<
AND$>=
AND$<=
AND$<>
OR$=
OR$>
OR$<
OR$>=
OR$<=
OR$<>
LOAD=3
LOAD>3
LOAD<3
LOAD>=3
LOAD<=3
LOAD<>3
AND=3
AND>3
AND<3
AND>=3
AND<=3
AND<>3
OR=3
OR>3
OR<3
OR>=3
OR<=3
OR<>3
LOADD=3
LOADD>3
LOADD<3
LOADD>=3
LOADD<=3
LOADD<>3
ANDD=3
ANDD>3
ANDD<3
ANDD>=3
ANDD<=3
ANDD<>3
ORD=3
ORD>3
ORD<3
ORD>=3
ORD<=3
ORD<>3
Nonexecuted
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
336
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
420
Executed
N=1
8526
8526
8526
8526
8526
8526
8358
8358
8358
8358
8358
8358
8862
8862
8862
8862
8862
8862
2268
2268
2268
2268
2268
2268
2100
2100
2100
2100
2100
2100
2604
2604
2604
2604
2604
2604
2268
2268
2268
2268
2268
2268
2100
2100
2100
2100
2100
2100
2604
2604
2604
2604
2604
2604
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
N=8 or X
Appendix 4-6
Nonexecuted
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
112
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
140
Executed
N=1
2842
2842
2842
2842
2842
2842
2786
2786
2786
2786
2786
2786
2954
2954
2954
2954
2954
2954
756
756
756
756
756
756
700
700
700
700
700
700
868
868
868
868
868
868
756
756
756
756
756
756
700
700
700
700
700
700
868
868
868
868
868
868
Executed
N=8 or X
Increase/
Decrease
Instruction
Rotate
Instruction
Instruction
INC
INCP
DINC
DINCP
INC4
INC4P
INC8
INC8P
DEC
DECP
DDEC
DDECP
DEC4
DEC4P
DEC8
DEC8P
INCU
INCUP
DINCU
DINCUP
DECU
DECUP
DDECU
DDECUP
ROL
ROLP
DROL
DROLP
ROL4
ROL4P
ROL8
ROL8P
ROR
RORP
DROR
DRORP
ROR4
ROR4P
ROR8
ROR8P
RCL
RCLP
DRCL
DRCLP
RCL4
RCL4P
RCL8
RCL8P
RCR
RCRP
DRCR
DRCRP
Nonexecuted
252
420
252
420
336
504
336
504
252
420
252
420
336
504
336
504
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
336
504
420
588
420
588
252
420
336
504
420
588
420
588
336
504
336
504
420
588
420
588
336
504
336
504
Executed
N=1
336
504
420
588
6426
6594
6426
6594
336
504
420
588
6426
6594
6426
6594
672
840
714
918
672
840
714
918
588
756
3444
3612
7014
7182
6762
6930
588
756
3444
3612
7014
7182
6762
6930
4200
4368
6216
6384
9198
9366
9114
9282
4116
4284
6216
6384
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
N=8 or X
252
420
252
420
336
504
336
504
252
420
252
420
336
504
336
504
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
336
504
420
588
420
588
252
420
336
504
420
588
420
588
336
504
336
504
420
588
420
588
336
504
336
504
Appendix 4-7
Nonexecuted
84
140
84
140
112
168
112
168
84
140
84
140
112
168
112
168
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
112
168
140
196
140
196
84
140
112
168
140
196
140
196
112
168
112
168
140
196
140
196
112
168
112
168
Executed
N=1
112
168
140
196
2142
2198
2142
2198
112
168
140
196
2142
2198
2142
2198
224
280
238
306
224
280
238
306
196
252
1148
1204
2338
2394
2254
2310
196
252
1148
1204
2338
2394
2254
2310
1400
1456
2072
2128
3066
3122
3038
3094
1372
1428
2072
2128
Executed
N=8 or X
Rotate
Instruction
Instruction
RCR4
RCR4P
RCR8
RCR8P
Nonexecuted
420
588
420
588
2MLK-CPUS
Executed
N=1
9030
9198
8946
9114
Executed
N=8 or X
Appendix 4-8
Nonexecuted
140
196
140
196
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
N=1
3010
3066
2982
3038
Executed
N=8 or X
Section
Move
Instruction
Exchange
Instruction
BIN
Operation
Instruction
Instruction
BSFT
BSFTP
BSFL
BSFLP
DBSFL
DBSFLP
BSFL4
BSFL4P
BSFL8
BSFL8P
BSFR
BSFRP
DBSFR
DBSFRP
BSFR4
BSFR4P
BSFR8
BSFR8P
WSFT
WSFTP
WSFL
WSFLP
WSFR
WSFRP
SR
XCHG
XCHGP
DXCHG
DXCHGP
GXCHG
GXCHGP
SWAP
SWAPP
GSWAP
GSWAPP
ADD
ADDP
DADD
DADDP
SUB
SUBP
DSUB
DSUBP
MUL
MULP
DMUL
DMULP
DIV
DIVP
DDIV
DDIVP
Nonexecuted
504
672
336
504
336
504
420
588
420
588
252
420
336
504
420
588
420
588
336
504
420
588
420
588
0
336
504
336
504
420
588
252
420
336
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
2MLK-CPUS
Executed
N=1
3864
4032
3108
3306
3444
3612
7014
7182
6762
6930
588
756
3444
3612
6762
6930
6762
6930
12138
12306
21798
21966
21714
21882
0
1512
1680
1848
2016
7854
8022
1344
1512
4662
4830
420
588
462
630
420
588
462
630
1722
1890
3150
3318
2436
2604
3864
4032
Executed
N=8 or X
21420
21588
21126
21294
12264
12432
8484
8652
Appendix 4-9
Nonexecuted
168
224
112
168
112
168
140
196
140
196
84
140
112
168
140
196
140
196
112
168
140
196
140
196
112
168
112
168
140
196
84
140
112
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
Unit: ns
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
Executed
N=1
N=8 or X
1288
1344
1036
1102
1148
1204
2338
2394
2254
2310
196
252
1148
1204
2254
2310
2254
2310
4046
4102
7266
7140
7322
7196
7238
7042
7294
7098
504
560
616
672
2618
2674
448
504
1554
1610
140
196
154
210
140
196
154
210
574
630
1050
1106
812
868
1288
1344
4088
4144
2828
2884
BIN
Operation
Instruction
BCD
Operation
Instruction
Instruction
ADDU
ADDUP
DADDU
DADDUP
SUBU
SUBUP
DSUBU
DSUBUP
MULU
MULUP
DMULU
DMULUP
DIVU
DIVUP
DDIVU
DDIVUP
RADD
RADDP
LADD
LADDP
RSUB
RSUBP
LSUB
LSUBP
RMUL
RMULP
LMUL
LMULP
RDIV
RDIVP
LDIV
LDIVP
$ADD
$ADDP
GADD
GADDP
GSUB
GSUBP
ADDB
ADDBP
DADDB
DADDBP
SUBB
SUBBP
DSUBB
DSUBBP
MULB
MULBP
DMULB
DMULBP
DIVB
DIVBP
DDIVB
DDIVBP
Nonexecuted
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
588
756
252
420
588
756
252
420
588
756
252
420
588
756
420
588
504
672
504
672
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
Executed
N=1
756
924
798
966
756
924
798
966
1890
2058
3318
3486
2604
2772
4032
4200
1442
1498
2870
2926
1442
1498
2870
2926
1948
2004
4186
4242
1974
2030
4200
4256
12768
12936
11046
11214
11046
11214
2730
2898
2856
3324
2730
2898
2856
3324
8316
8394
18648
18816
7224
7392
8736
8904
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
N=8 or X
35490
35658
15456
15624
15456
15624
Appendix 4-10
Nonexecuted
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
196
252
84
140
196
252
84
140
196
252
84
140
196
252
140
196
168
224
168
224
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
Executed
N=1
252
308
266
322
252
308
266
322
630
686
1106
1162
868
924
1344
1400
602
658
1078
1134
602
658
1078
1134
1106
1162
2394
2450
1134
1200
2660
2716
4256
4312
3682
3738
3682
3738
910
966
952
1108
910
966
952
1108
2772
2798
6216
6272
2408
2464
2912
2968
Executed
N=8 or X
11830
11886
5152
5208
5152
5208
Logic
Operation
System
Instruction
Data
Process
Instruction
Instruction
WAND
WANDP
DWAND
DWANDP
WOR
WORP
DWOR
DWORP
WXOR
WXORP
DWXOR
DWXORP
WXNR
WXNRP
DWXNR
DWXNRP
GWAND
GWANDP
GWOR
GWORP
GWXOR
GWXORP
GWXNR
GWXNRP
FALS
DUTY
WDT
WDTP
OUTOFF
STOP
BSUM
BSUMP
DBSUM
DBSUMP
BRST
BRSTP
ENCO
ENCOP
DECO
DECOP
DIS
DISP
UNI
UNIP
WTOB
WTOBP
BTOW
BTOWP
IORF
IORFP
SCH
SCHP
DSCH
DSHP
Nonexecuted
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
504
672
504
672
504
672
504
672
252
Executed
N=1
588
756
588
756
588
756
588
756
588
756
588
756
672
840
672
840
11046
11214
11046
11214
11046
11214
11130
11298
1344
336
504
336
504
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
10836
11004
20496
20664
6552
6720
4284
4452
3444
3612
5754
5922
6006
6174
8484
8652
8400
8568
504
672
504
672
6594
6762
6846
7014
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
N=8 or X
Nonexecuted
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
168
224
168
224
168
224
168
224
84
Executed
N=1
196
252
196
252
196
252
196
252
196
252
196
252
224
280
224
280
3682
3738
3682
3738
3682
3738
3710
3766
448
15456
15624
10248
10416
7896
8064
8148
8316
11676
11844
12180
12348
112
168
112
168
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
3612
3668
6832
6888
2184
2240
1428
1484
1148
1204
1918
1974
2002
2058
2828
2884
2800
2856
5152
5208
3416
3472
2632
2688
2716
2772
3892
3948
4060
4116
15120
15288
16548
16716
168
224
168
224
2198
2254
2282
2338
5040
5096
5516
5572
15456
15624
15456
15624
15456
15624
16128
16296
Appendix 4-11
Executed
N=8 or X
5152
5208
5152
5208
5152
5208
5376
5432
Instruction
Data
Process
Instruction
MAX
MAXP
DMAX
DMAXP
MIN
MINP
DMIN
DMINP
SUM
SUMP
DSUM
DSUMP
AVE
AVEP
DAVE
DAVEP
MUX
MUXP
DMUX
DMUXP
DETECT
DETECTP
RAMP
SORT
DSORT
Nonexecuted
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
504
672
504
672
504
672
2MLK-CPUS
Executed
N=1
5208
5376
5628
5796
5292
5460
5712
5880
6006
6174
6468
6636
8736
8874
12600
12768
5376
5544
5628
5796
5460
5628
Executed
N=8 or X
9282
9450
10878
11046
9618
9786
11214
11382
9828
9996
11760
11934
14028
14196
23478
23646
10248
10416
Appendix 4-12
Nonexecuted
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
168
224
168
224
168
224
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
N=1
1736
1792
1876
1932
1764
1820
1904
1960
2002
2058
2156
2212
2912
2958
4200
4256
1792
1848
1876
1932
1820
1876
Executed
N=8 or X
3094
3150
3626
3682
3206
3262
3738
3794
3276
3332
3920
3978
4676
4732
7826
7882
3416
3472
Data
Table
Process
Instruction
Display
String
Process
Instruction
Instruction
FIWR
FIWRP
FIFRD
FIFRDP
FILRD
FILRDP
FINS
FINSP
FDEL
FDELP
SEG
SEGP
BINDA
BINDAP
DBINDA
DBINDAP
BINHA
BINHAP
DBINHA
DBINHAP
BCDDA
BCDDAP
DBCDDA
DBCDDAP
DABIN
DABINP
DDABIN
DDABINP
HABIN
HABINP
DHABIN
DHABINP
DABCD
DABCDP
DDABCD
DDABCDP
LEN
LENP
STR
STRP
DSTR
DSTRP
VAL
VALP
DVAL
DVALP
RSTR
RSTRP
LSTR
LSTRP
STRR
STRRP
STRL
STRLP
Nonexecuted
2MLK-CPUS
Executed
N=1
420
588
336
504
336
504
336
504
336
504
336
504
336
504
336
504
336
504
336
504
336
504
336
504
336
504
336
504
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
336
504
420
588
13188
13356
15498
15666
25410
25578
8316
8484
12180
12336
12096
12264
19824
19992
6426
6594
11172
11340
11172
11340
22512
22680
15456
15624
30324
30492
2520
2688
34314
34482
69720
69888
28938
29106
60690
60858
273630
273798
292824
292992
1050000
1050000
1050000
1050000
Executed
N=8 or X
Nonexecuted
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
N=1
23898
24066
28938
29106
52290
52488
140
196
112
168
112
168
112
168
112
168
112
168
112
168
112
168
112
168
112
168
112
168
112
168
112
168
112
168
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
112
168
140
196
4396
4452
5166
5222
8470
8526
2772
2828
4060
4112
4032
4088
6608
6664
2142
2198
3724
3780
3724
3780
7504
7560
5152
5208
10108
10164
840
896
11438
11494
23240
23296
9646
9702
20230
20286
91210
91266
97608
97664
350000
350000
350000
350000
17346
17514
3528
3696
7812
7980
Appendix 4-13
Executed
N=8 or X
7966
8022
9646
9702
17430
17496
5782
5838
1176
1232
2604
2660
Instruction
String
Process
Instruction
ASCP
ASC
HEX
HEXP
RIGHT
RIGHTP
LEFT
LEFTP
MID
MIDP
REPLACE
REPLACEP
FIND
FINDP
RBCD
RBCDP
LBCD
LBCDP
BCDR
BCDRP
BCDL
BCDLP
Nonexecuted
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
504
672
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
2MLK-CPUS
Executed
N=1
8232
8400
7098
7266
18396
18594
17430
17598
19026
19194
33348
33516
8904
9072
134820
134988
153636
153804
48972
49140
80556
80724
Executed
N=8 or X
23520
23685
20412
20580
21630
21798
20664
20832
22260
22428
Appendix 4-14
Nonexecuted
196
140
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
168
224
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
N=1
2800
2744
2366
2422
6132
6198
5810
5866
6342
6398
11116
11172
2968
3024
44940
44996
51212
51268
16324
16380
26852
26908
Executed
N=8 or X
7895
7840
6804
6860
7210
7266
6888
6944
7420
7476
Special
Function
Instruction
Data
Control
Instruction
Time
related
Instruction
Instruction
SIN
SINP
COS
COSP
TAN
TANP
RAD
RADP
DEG
DEGP
SQRT
SQRTP
LIMIT
LIMITP
DLIMIT
DLIMITP
DZONE
DZONEP
DDZONE
DDZONEP
VZONE
VZONEP
DVZONE
DVZONEP
DATERD
DATERDP
DATEWR
DATEWR
P
ADDCLK
ADDCLKP
SUBCLK
SUBCLKP
SECOND
SECOND
P
HOUR
HOURP
Nonexecuted
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
420
588
504
672
504
672
504
672
504
672
504
672
504
672
252
420
252
2MLK-CPUS
Executed
N=1
75798
75966
73710
73878
155988
156156
13062
13230
13062
13230
6972
7140
1848
1986
1932
2100
26796
26964
25704
25872
27510
27708
26418
26586
5796
5964
5964
Nonexecuted
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
140
196
168
224
168
224
168
224
168
224
168
224
168
224
84
140
84
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
N=1
25266
25322
24570
24626
51996
52052
4354
4410
4354
4410
2324
2380
616
662
644
700
8932
8988
8568
8624
9170
9236
8806
8862
1932
1988
1988
420
6132
140
2044
420
588
420
588
336
8526
8694
8610
8778
6636
140
196
140
196
112
2842
2898
2870
2926
2212
504
6804
168
2268
336
504
7098
7266
112
168
2366
2422
Executed
N=8 or X
Appendix 4-15
Executed
N=8 or X
Diverge
Instrution
Loop
Flag
Interrupt
Instruction
Sign
Reverse
Instruction
File
related
Instruction
Special
Module
Instruction
PID
Instruction
Instruction
JMP
LABEL
CALL
CALLP
SBRT
RET
FOR
NEXT
BREAK
STC
CLC
CLE
EI
DI
EI
DI
TDINT n
INT n
NEG
NEGP
DNEG
DNEGP
RNEG
RNEGP
LNEG
LNEGP
ABS
ABSP
DABS
DABSP
RSET
RCLR
ZRCLR
EMOV
EDMOV
EBREAD
EBWRITE
Nonexecuted
2MLK-CPUS
Executed
N=1
Nonexecuted
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
N=1
168
168
168
168
168
168
56
56
56
56
56
56
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
252
420
420
588
462
630
1596
1764
1932
2100
1428
1596
1512
1680
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
84
140
140
196
154
210
532
588
644
700
476
532
504
560
Executed
N=8 or X
GET
GETP
PUT
PUTP
GETM
GETMP
PUTM
PUTMP
PIDRUN
PIDPRMT
PIDPAUSE
PIDSTOP
Appendix 4-16
Executed
N=8 or X
Instruction
Communication
P2PSN
P2PWRD
P2PWW
R
P2PBRD
P2PBWR
Position
Control
Instruction
ORG
FLT
DST
IST
LIN
CIN
SST
VTP
PTV
STP
SKP
SSP
SSS
POR
SOR
PSO
NMV
INCH
RTP
SNS
SRS
MOF
PRS
ZOE
ZOD
EPRS
TEA
TEAA
EMG
CLR
ECLR
PST
TBP
TEP
THP
TMP
TSP
TCP
Nonexecuted
2MLK-CPUS
Executed
N=1
Executed
N=8 or X
Appendix 4-17
Nonexecuted
2MLK-CPUH
Executed
N=1
Executed
N=8 or X
Australia
Honeywell Ltd.
Phone : (61) 2-9353-4500
Fax : (61) 2-9353-7677
Japan
Honeywell Inc.
Phone: (81)3-5440-1395
Fax: (81)3-5440-1368
Singapore
Honeywell Pte Ltd.
Phone: (65) 6355-2828
Fax: (65) 6445-3033
China
Honeywell (Tianjin) Ltd. Beijing
Phone: (86-10) 8458-3280
Fax: (86-10) 8458-3102
South Korea
Honeywell Co., Ltd.
Phone : (82) 2-799-6114
Fax : (82) 2-792-9015
Thailand
Honeywell Systems Ltd.
Phone: (662) 693-3099
Fax: (662) 693-3085
Malaysia
Honeywell Engineering Sdn Bhd.
Phone: (603) 7958-4988
Fax: (603) 7958-8922
Taiwan
Honeywell Taiwan Ltd.
Phone: (886) 2-2245-1000
Fax: (886) 2-2245-3241
New Zealand
Honeywell Ltd.
Phone: (64-9) 623-5050
Fax: (64-9) 623-5060
Indonesia
PT Honeywell Indonesia
Phone : (62) 21-535-8833
Fax : (62) 21-5367-1008
India
Honeywell Automation India Ltd.
Phone: (91) 20-5603-9400
Fax: (91) 20-5603-9800
Philippines
Honeywell Systems Inc.
Phone: (63-2) 633-2830
Fax: (63-2) 638-4013
email : MasterLogic@honeywell.com